Yamaha RX A3070/RX A2070 Owner's Manual Web YJ291A0 EN1 A3070 2070 Om UCRABGLF En A0

User Manual: Yamaha RX-A3070/RX-A2070 Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 209

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual

• This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home.
• This manual explains preparations and operations for everyday users of the unit.
• Read the supplied booklet “Quick Start Guide” before using the unit.

CONTENTS
Introduction

3 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................48
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) ......................................................48

Accessories................................................................................... 5

DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only) ..........................................................49

About this book ............................................................................ 5

4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna .....50

About remote control .................................................................... 6

Connecting the network cable.....................................................................................................................50
Preparing the wireless antenna ...................................................................................................................50

Batteries ......................................................................................................................................................... 6

5 Connecting other devices............................................................51

Operating range of the remote control......................................................................................................... 6

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function ........................................................................51

FEATURES

6 Connecting the power cable ........................................................51

7 Selecting an on-screen menu language ........................................52

What you can do with the unit ........................................................ 7

8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings..................................53

AV CONTROLLER........................................................................................................................................... 12

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) ..................54

AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet) ........................................................................................................................ 12

Multi Position ................................................................................................................................................56

MusicCast CONTROLLER.............................................................................................................................. 12

Angle/Height .................................................................................................................................................57

Part names and functions .............................................................13

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) ................................................................................57

Front panel ................................................................................................................................................... 13

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)........................................................................60

Front display (indicators) ............................................................................................................................ 15

Checking the measurement results .............................................................................................................63

Rear panel..................................................................................................................................................... 16

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments.................................................................................................63

Remote control ............................................................................................................................................ 18

Error messages .............................................................................................................................................64
Warning messages ........................................................................................................................................65

PREPARATIONS

10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly .................................66

Selecting the connection method ...............................................................................................................66
Connecting the unit to a wireless network..................................................................................................67

General setup procedure ..............................................................19

Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) .............................................................72

1 Connecting speakers ..................................................................20

11 Connecting to the MusicCast network ........................................74

Basic speaker configuration ........................................................................................................................ 21

MusicCast CONTROLLER ..............................................................................................................................74

Advanced speaker configuration ................................................................................................................ 30

Adding the unit to the MusicCast network ..................................................................................................74

2 Connecting a TV and playback devices .........................................41
Input/output jacks and cables .................................................................................................................... 41
Connecting a TV ........................................................................................................................................... 43
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) ................................................................................. 44
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) ......................................................................................... 46
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel ................................................................................................ 47
En

PLAYBACK

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device ........................99
Connecting a USB storage device ................................................................................................................99

Basic playback procedure .............................................................75

Playback of USB storage device contents .................................................................................................100

Selecting an HDMI output jack .................................................................................................................... 75

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ................. 103

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) ......................................................................................76

Media sharing setup ...................................................................................................................................103

Registering a scene ...................................................................................................................................... 77

Listening to Internet radio .......................................................... 107

Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments................................................................... 77

Playback of Internet radio..........................................................................................................................107

Selecting the sound mode.............................................................78

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites) ...........................................................................109

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3) ............................................................................. 79

Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay................................ 110

Playback of PC music contents ..................................................................................................................104

Enjoying unprocessed playback.................................................................................................................. 82

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents ..................................................................................................110

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct).......................................................................................... 83

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) ............ 112

Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer) .................................................................................................................... 83

Multi-zone configuration examples ...........................................................................................................112
Preparing the multi zone system ...............................................................................................................113

Listening to FM/AM radio
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) ........................84

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 ...........................................................................................................116

Registering favorite items (shortcut) ........................................... 118

Setting the frequency steps......................................................................................................................... 84

Registering an item.....................................................................................................................................118

Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 85

Recalling a registered item.........................................................................................................................118

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) .............................................................................................. 85

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) ................. 119

Operating the radio on the TV ..................................................................................................................... 87

Top menu screen ........................................................................................................................................120

Listening to DAB radio
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)............................88

Control screen.............................................................................................................................................120
Settings screen............................................................................................................................................121

Preparing the DAB tuning ............................................................................................................................ 88

Viewing the current status.......................................................... 122

Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................ 89

Switching information on the front display ..............................................................................................122

Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)....................................................................................... 89

Viewing the status information on the TV .................................................................................................123

Displaying the DAB information .................................................................................................................. 90

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu)........................................................................... 124

Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label ........................................................................... 91

Listening to FM radio
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)............................93

Option menu items.....................................................................................................................................124

Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 93

CONFIGURATIONS

Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)......................................................................................... 93

129

Radio Data System tuning ........................................................................................................................... 94
Operating the radio on the TV ..................................................................................................................... 95

Configuring input sources (Input menu)....................................... 129

Playing back music via Bluetooth ..................................................97

Input menu items .......................................................................................................................................130

Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit ...................................................................................... 97

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) ............................. 132

Enjoying audio using Bluetooth speakers/headphones ............................................................................ 98

Scene menu items ......................................................................................................................................132

APPENDIX

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu).................................................................. 135

173

DSP Program menu items.......................................................................................................................... 136

Frequently asked questions ........................................................ 173

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) ................................ 138

Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 174

Setup menu items ...................................................................................................................................... 139

First, check the following: ..........................................................................................................................174

Speaker (Manual Setup) ............................................................................................................................ 142

Power, system and remote control ...........................................................................................................174

Sound.......................................................................................................................................................... 147

Audio ...........................................................................................................................................................176

Video ........................................................................................................................................................... 149

Video............................................................................................................................................................178

HDMI ........................................................................................................................................................... 151

FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) .....179

Network ...................................................................................................................................................... 152

DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)....................................................................179

Bluetooth.................................................................................................................................................... 154

Bluetooth ....................................................................................................................................................180

Multi Zone................................................................................................................................................... 155

USB and network ........................................................................................................................................181

Function...................................................................................................................................................... 158

Error indications on the front display .......................................... 183

ECO ............................................................................................................................................................. 160

Glossary .................................................................................... 184

Language .................................................................................................................................................... 161

Audio information (audio decoding format) .............................................................................................184

Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) ............... 161

Audio Information (Others) ........................................................................................................................186

Types of information.................................................................................................................................. 162

HDMI and video information ......................................................................................................................186

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)............ 163

Network information ..................................................................................................................................187

ADVANCED SETUP menu items ................................................................................................................. 164

Yamaha technologies .................................................................................................................................187

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) ..................................................................... 164

Supported devices and file formats ............................................. 188

Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR)................................................................ 164

Supported devices......................................................................................................................................188

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)........................................................................................... 165

File formats .................................................................................................................................................188

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) ........................................................ 165
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) .......................................................................................... 165

Video signal flow........................................................................ 189

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK)....................................................... 165

Video conversion table ...............................................................................................................................189

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) ...................................................................................... 166

Multi-zone output ...................................................................... 190

Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE) .................................................................... 166

Information on HDMI.................................................................. 190

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) ........................................................................... 166

HDMI Control...............................................................................................................................................190

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)............................................................................................... 167

Audio Return Channel (ARC) ......................................................................................................................192

Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE).................................................................................................... 167

HDMI signal compatibility ..........................................................................................................................192

Checking the firmware version (VERSION) ............................................................................................... 167

Trademarks............................................................................... 193

Controlling external devices with the remote control ................... 168

Specifications............................................................................ 194

Registering the remote control code for a TV........................................................................................... 168
Registering the remote control codes for playback devices.................................................................... 169
Resetting remote control codes ................................................................................................................ 170

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network .............................. 171
Updating the unit’s firmware immediately .............................................................................................. 171
Updating the unit’s firmware at power off ............................................................................................... 172
En

Introduction
Accessories

About this book

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

# AM antenna

The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the RX-A3070 (U.S.A. model), unless
otherwise specified.

# YPAO microphone

In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.

(except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)

Some features are not available in certain regions.
Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without
notice.
This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

# Microphone base
Pole

This manual describes all the “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to
“iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.

# FM antenna
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)

Icons used in this manual

Y
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

X
# Power cable

indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

# Remote control
# DAB/FM antenna
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)

# Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
# CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
# Quick Start Guide

* (Except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
One of the above FM antennas is supplied depending on the region of purchase.
* The microphone base and pole are used for angle/height measurement during YPAO.
* The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase.

About remote control
This section explains how to use the supplied remote control.

Batteries
Insert the batteries the right way round.

Operating range of the remote control
Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the
operating range shown below.

Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°

30°

FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
The unit is equipped with the various useful features.

More advanced ENTERTAINMENT
sound programs (p.80)

Various wireless connection
methods (p.66)

Connecting various devices (p.41)
By processing front left and front right sound fields

The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on

individually, the ENTERTAINMENT sound programs are

connect to your wireless router (access point) without a

the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD

further improved in acoustic positioning and sound

network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct

players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles,

transition. These programs allow you to enjoy clearer vocal

enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly

camcorders, and other devices.

and instrumental sounds, distinct narrations, and more

without router.

dynamic sound effects.

Playing back TV audio in surround
sound with a single HDMI cable
connection (Audio Return Channel:
ARC) (p.41)

Home Audio Network with
MusicCast (p.74)
PL
Presence L
Sound field

PR
Presence R
Sound field

The unit supports the MusicCast feature that allows you to
link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a
different room and play them back simultaneously, or

When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI

control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated

cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the

application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
HDMI Control
TV audio

Low power consumption (p.161)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s

Video from external
device

SL
Surround L
Sound field

SR
Surround R
Sound field

Image of sound field processing

power consumption.

CINEMA DSP
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires
for more than 30 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.

What is a sound field?

CINEMA DSP

We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard directly

Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound

but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the walls or

fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this

ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is affected by the

data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of sound programs

shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken together are what give

using CINEMA DSP.

us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.

By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source such as

This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”.

movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of that specific
content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you the sensation of

Conceptual diagram of a concert hall’s sound field

actually being in that scene.)

CINEMA DSP HD3
“CINEMA DSP HD3” is Yamaha’s flagship 3D sound field playback technology that takes full
advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the sound field data.
It delivers more than twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as
conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an
utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field.

Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit

Capability for reproducing reflections

Level

(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
CINEMA DSP HD3

CINEMA DSP 3D

Time

YPAO
YPAO is Yamaha original automatic calibration system to optimizing your sound and surround environment by using microphone measurement. It can be create ideal listening environment for
maximizing high sound quality contents playback by adjusting various speakers setting and the sound field automatically.

YPAO-R.S.C.

YPAO 3D measurement

In typical home, the sound has problems such as a blurred low-frequency range or a smearing

The direction (angle) of front, surround and presence speakers, and the height of presence

of the acoustical sound image caused by undesirable sound reflection from the walls or ceiling.

speakers as seen from the listening position is measured, and compensation is applied to

“YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only the unwanted reflections and produces the

maximize the 3D sound field effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP.

acoustic perfection for your listening environment.
Level

Compensation
Time

YPAO Volume
YPAO Volume automatically adjusts the high and low frequency levels at any volume level so

Level

High

that you hear natural sounds even at low volume.

Low

YPAO Volume ON

YPAO Volume OFF
Frequency

High

Unrivaled audio and video quality
You can enjoy unrivaled high-quality audio and videos with the unit.

High-resolution music enhancer

High-quality video processing

Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz

From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played back as

content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening of the

a high-quality image (p.149).

musicality in the original content (p.127).

• Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing
• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection

Before processing
Loudness

• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source
Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz
signal (such as a CD)

You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement.

Frequency

After processing
Loudness

Playback bandwidth of a
88.2/96 kHz signal

Frequency

Expandable to meet diverse needs
The unit provides excellent expandability which is applicable to all uses.

Support for bi-amp connections and external power amp
expansion

Multi-zone function
The multi-zone function (p.112) allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).

To obtain even high audio quality, you can connect front speakers that support power amp

(The following shows examples of use.)

expansion, or expand your system by adding an external power amp (such as a Hi-Fi amp).
For details, refer to “Advanced speaker configuration” (p.30).

Enjoying music using speakers in another room

The best expandability in Yamaha (RX-A3070 only)

While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can listen to music through the

By connecting an external power amp, you can enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP - an

speakers of a different room.

11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field.
(Example)
External power amp

Study room
(such as Zone2)

Living room (main zone)

Enjoying videos using a TV in another room (HDMI connection)
While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can enjoy videos and music
being input via HDMI on a TV in a different room.

Kitchen
(such as Zone4)

Living room (main zone)

Useful applications
The following applications provide you the flexibility to control the unit or assist you with the cable connections.

AV CONTROLLER

AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet)

MusicCast CONTROLLER

“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a

“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with

MusicCast CONTROLLER is an application that allows you to

Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network

cable connections between AV receiver and source devices

link a MusicCast compatible device to other MusicCast

products. This application provides you the flexibility to

as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides you

compatible devices in other rooms and play them back

control the available inputs, volume, mute, power

through the various settings such as speaker connections,

simultaneously. This app lets you use your smartphone or

commands and playback source.

TV and video/audio device connections and selecting the

other mobile device instead of the remote control to easily

speaker system.

select music to play back as well as configure the unit and

Functions

MusicCast compatible devices.

• Power on/off and volume adjustment

Functions

• Input, scene and sound mode selection

• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices)

Functions

• DSP Parameter adjustment

• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance

• Selecting and playing back various content

• Playback control (including music selection for some

with illustrations)

– Play back music from your mobile device

• Viewing owner’s manual

– Select an Internet radio station

– Play back music files stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google

For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google

Play.

sources)

– Play back music files stored on a USB storage device
• Operating and configuring the unit
– Select the input source, adjust the volume and mute the
audio output
– Select from a wide variety of sound processing features

X
For details, search for “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or
Google Play.

Part names and functions
This section explains the functions of the parts of the unit.

Front panel
a

MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

INPUT
ON SCREEN

OPTION

SCENE

TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT
1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

INFO (WPS)

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

(CONNECT)

MULTI ZONE

PROGRAM
ENTER

RETURN

ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO AUX

PHONES
USB

f
a MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

b Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.151)

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

AUDIO

HDMI IN

f INPUT knob

Opening the front panel door

Selects an input source.

To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently

g Front panel door

press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed

For protecting controls and jacks (p.14).

h VOLUME knob

when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)

Adjusts the volume.

• Standby Through is enabled (p.152)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.153)
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.154)

c Front display
Displays information (p.15).

d Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.6).

e PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.83).
En

■ Inside of the front panel door
a

cd e

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SCENE

TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT
1

INFO (WPS)

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

(CONNECT)

MULTI ZONE

PROGRAM
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO AUX

PHONES
USB

a ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

b Menu operations keys
Cursor keys: Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen.

c OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.124).

d DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.123).

e TONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of
output sounds (p.125).

f STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.82).
Enters MusicCast CONTROLLER registration by holding down for 5
seconds (p.74).

g PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.78).

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

AUDIO

HDMI IN

i MULTI ZONE keys

(U.S.A. model)

m PRESET keys

ZONE 2-4: Enables/disables the audio output to each zone
(p.116).
ZONE CONTROL: Changes the zone that is controlled by the keys
and knobs on the front panel (p.116).

j INFO (WPS) key

Select a preset FM/DAB radio station (p.90, p.94) (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models) or a preset FM/AM radio station (p.86)
(other models).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.118).

n TUNING keys

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.122).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button
configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.68).

k MEMORY key

Select the radio frequency (p.85).

o USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.99).

p YPAO MIC jack

Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as preset stations (p.85, p.89,
p.93).
Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
shortcuts (p.118).

l FM and AM keys (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
Switch between FM and AM (p.85).

FM and DAB keys (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
Switch between FM and DAB (p.89, p.85).

h SCENE keys
Select the assigned input source (including the selected radio
station or content when it is assigned), sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is
in standby mode (p.76).
En

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.54).

q PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.

r VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console
(p.47).

Front display (indicators)
a bc

f g

ECO

VOL. MUTE A-DRC
VIRTUAL YPAO VOL.

ZONE ZONE ZONE PARTY
2
3
4
IN OUT 1 2
LINK MASTER STEREO TUNED
Hi-Res ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3

lmn

q r

a HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.

OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal.

b ECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.161).

c Firmware update indicator
Lights up when a firmware update is available via the network
(p.171)

d LINK MASTER
Lights up when the unit is the master device of the MusicCast
network.

e ZONE indicators
Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.116).

f STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM radio station signal
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) or an FM/AM radio
station signal (other models).

g PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.117).

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

rs
h Information display

s VIRTUAL

Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode
name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.122).

i Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.

Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.79), or the virtual surround
processing (p.81) is working.

t Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

j MUTE
Blinks when audio is temporarily muted.

A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)

k A-DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.125) is working.

l Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.66).

m Bluetooth indicator

D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)

Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.97).

n Hi-Res

K Surround back speaker
B Front presence speaker (L)

Lights up when the high-resolution mode (p.127) is working.

N Front presence speaker (R)
M Rear presence speaker (L)

o CINEMA DSP indicator
“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.79) is working.

< Rear presence speaker (R)

“CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD3 is activated.

C Subwoofer (1)
V Subwoofer (2)

p ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.83) is working.

q SLEEP

u YPAO VOL.
Lights up when YPAO Volume is enabled (p.125).

Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

r Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

Rear panel
a

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT

NETWORK
( 3 NET )

(HDCP2.2)

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

AC IN

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 4

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 1

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

VIDEO

RS-232C

OUT

2
B

PHONO

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AV 2

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

6 OPTICAL

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS
R

AUDIO 4
R

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

FRONT

EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

SINGLE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

(RX-A3070 U.S.A. model)
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper
connections.

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP

a PHONO jacks

o ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks (RX-A3070)

For connecting to a turntable (p.46).

For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.113), or for
connecting to an external power amplifier for front presence or rear presence channels (p.40).

b AUDIO 1-3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.46).

ZONE OUT jacks (RX-A2070)

AUDIO 4 (XLR) jacks (RX-A3070 only)

For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.113).

p SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting audio signals (p.46).

For connecting to speakers (p.20).

c AV 1-4 jacks

q PRE OUT jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.44).

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.28) or to an external power amplifier (p.40).

d HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.41). When using ARC, TV
audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.44), or for connecting to
an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.114).

e COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1-2) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals
(p.45).

f HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.44).

g TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.51).

h REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other
devices from another room (p.115).

i NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.50).

j Wireless antenna
For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.66) and a Bluetooth connection (p.97).

k RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details.

l VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Brazil and General models only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.51).

m AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.51).

n ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to radio antennas (p.48).

Remote control
a Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.
SOURCE

b RECEIVER z key

RECEIVER

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

V-AUX

RECEIVER key
Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.169). This key lights
up in orange after pressed.

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

SOURCE key
Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.169). This
key lights up in green after pressed.

TUNER

d
e

MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

MUTE

p
q

VOLUME

r
s

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

k
l
m
n

MODE

TUNING

MUSIC

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

TV CH

MUTE

CODE SET

External device operation keys
Let you play back and perform other operations for external devices
when an input source other than “TUNER” is selected (p.169).
Select a sound mode (p.78).

l INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.122).

m SLEEP key
Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min, 90 min,
60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to the standby mode.

n Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as presets (p.85, p.89, p.93).
Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
shortcuts (p.118).

o TV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.168).
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.75).

q PARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.117).

r VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.

s MUTE key

g External device operation keys
Select menus for external devices (p.169).

Mutes the audio output.

t OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.124).

u DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.123).

v CODE SET key

h ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
(RX-A3070)

PRESET: Select a preset station.
TUNING: Select the radio frequency.

p HDMI OUT key

Select a sound program, a surround decoder, an input source, a
network source, a registered item (shortcut), a browse screen page,
the volume of dialogue sounds or shuffle/repeat settings (p.158).

INPUT
TV VOL

BLUETOOTH: Bluetooth connection
(the unit as a Bluetooth receiver)
USB: USB jack (on the front panel)
NET: NETWORK sources
(press repeatedly to select a desired network source)
TUNER: FM/AM/DAB radio

f PROGRAM keys

Select an input source for playback.
AV 1-7: AV 1-7 jacks
V-AUX: VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1-4 (RX-A3070): AUDIO 1-4 jacks
AUDIO 1-3 (RX-A2070): AUDIO 1-3 jacks
PHONO: PHONO jacks

Select the registered input source, sound program, and various
settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in
standby mode (p.76).

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO

c Input selection keys

e SCENE keys

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

Turns on/off an external device.

Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control (p.116).

PRESET

Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.85).
BAND: Switches between FM and DAB radio (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models), or FM and AM radio (other models).

k Sound mode keys

SOURCE z key

d ZONE switch

BAND

j Radio keys

i Menu operation keys
Cursor keys: Select a menu or the parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen.
En

Registers remote control codes of external devices on the remote
control (p.168).

X
To operate external devices with the remote control, register a remote
control code for each device before using (p.168).

PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.20)
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.41)
3 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.48)
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.50)
5 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.51)
6 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.51)
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.52)
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.53)
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.54)
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.66)
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.74)
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.30).
Caution
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.27).

Ideal speaker layout

Functions of each speaker
Speaker type

0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

2
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

4
10°~30°

Front (L/R)
12

Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).

Center 3

Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).

Surround (L/R)
45

Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce
surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.

Surround back (L/R)
67

Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.

Front presence (L/R)
ER

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.

Rear presence (L/R)
TY

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.

10°~30°
Subwoofer 9

Function

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of
other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and
place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.

X
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker

layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such
as distances) to suit the speaker layout.

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend
using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence
speakers for further spatial sounds).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence
speakers.
En

Basic speaker configuration
If you do not apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external amplifier) or multi-zone configurations, follow the procedure below to place the speakers in your room and connect
them to the unit.

■ Placing speakers in your room

7.2.2/5.2.4 system [S]

Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This

(using both surround back and rear presence speakers)

section describes the representative speaker layout examples.

This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a

highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.

• To have a full effect of Dolby Atmos contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark. However,
you can also play back Dolby Atmos contents with the 7.1 system (using surround back speakers).

• To have a full effect of DTS:X contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark.
1

• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead

speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence speaker
9

layout” (p.26).

Y
6

X
• The surround back speakers and rear presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP (p.79).
• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled
speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the
“Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.53).
• (RX-A3070 only)
By using an external power amplifier (p.31), you can make an 11-channel system [★7.2.4] and enjoy Dolby
Atmos and DTS:X contents with the front presence and rear presence speakers.

5.2.4 system [S] (using rear presence speakers)

7.2.2 system [S] (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a highly-natural

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional

3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the

sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back

surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for

speakers.

enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
E

R
1

1
9

5
6

• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing

When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled

YPAO (p.53).

speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the “Setup”
menu before performing YPAO (p.53).

• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers
to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.

5.1.2 system [S] (using front presence speakers)

7.1 system (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional

This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy

speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not

extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.

X
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
YPAO (p.53).
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers
to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.

5.1 system

5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using surround speakers)
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.

X
You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (4.1 system).

X
When placing surround speakers in the front side, set “Layout (Surround)” in the “Setup” menu to “Front” before
performing YPAO (p.53).

5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using front presence speakers)

2.1 system

We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.

R
1

X
Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1 system.

X
When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO
(p.53).

Presence speaker layout

Dolby Enabled SP
Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.

The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height/Rear Height,
Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening

It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from speakers

environment.

that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.

X
• You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Cinema DSP HD3 with any layout pattern.
• You can configure the placement patterns for front presence and rear presence speakers separately.

Front Height/Rear Height
Install the presence speakers on the front/rear side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom sound
spaces, and sound extensity effectively.

X
Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker unit
may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled
speakers.

Notes on installation of ceiling speakers
When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, use the following illustration as a reference.
When using two presence speakers
Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of front and
rear sound spaces effectively.

Installation position
Just above the listening position, or the ceiling between extensions of front speakers and

listening position

For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers” (p.26).

■ Setting the speaker impedance

When using four presence speakers

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm
speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

1
2

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z

STRAIGHT

Installation position
Front presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position

Rear presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the listening position and surround (or surround back)

Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

SPEAKER¡IMP.
¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN

speakers
Caution

4
5

Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.

Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power
cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

■ Connecting speakers

Speakers to be connected

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

Speaker system
(the number of channels)

Speaker type

Precaution for connecting of the speaker cables
Prepare speaker cables in a place away from the unit, to avoid accidentally dropping wire
strands into the unit’s interior which could result in a short circuit or malfunction of the unit.
Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause short circuit and also damage the unit
or the speakers.

7.2.2/5.2.4

7.1/5.1.2

5.1

2.1

Front (L/R) 1 2

(

Center 3

(

Surround (L/R) 4 5

(

)*5

)*1

)*3

Front presence (L/R) E R

(

)*4

)*6

Rear presence (L/R) T Y

)*2
(

(

Surround back (L/R) 6 7

• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before
connecting the speakers.
• Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables firmly together.

Subwoofer 9

(

If you have eleven speakers, you can connect the both surround back speakers and rear
presence speakers. In this case, the unit automatically changes the speakers to be used,
depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP.
If you have nine speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or rear presence
speakers (*2).

• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable touch one another.

If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*3) or front presence
speakers (*4).
If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*5) or front presence speakers
(*6).

X
• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,

• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable come into contact with the unit’s metal parts

configure the “Layout (Subwoofer)” setting (p.145) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an

(rear panel and screws).

AC wall outlet.
• When apply this speaker configuration, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.142) to “Basic” (default).
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.40).

Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
If “Check SP Wires” appear on the front display when the unit is turned on, turn off the unit, and
+
–

then check the speaker cables short circuit.

+
–

Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)

Connecting speaker cables

Connection diagram
Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

The unit
(rear)
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and
the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent

confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.

FRONT

SURROUND

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

SUR. BACK

CENTER

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

FRONT

EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE

Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.

2
3

Loosen the speaker terminal.

Tighten the terminal.

SINGLE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP

R
1

Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.

+ (red)

FR
ON

4
9

– (black)

Using a banana plug
4

(U.S.A., Canada, China, Brazil and General models only)

Y
6

Tighten the speaker terminal.

Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

FR
ON

Banana plug

Y
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).

Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Audio pin cable
PRE

OUT

(SING

LE)

(FR
ONT)
1

2
SURR
UND

SUR.

BACK

SUBW
OOFE

SURR
OUN

CENT

D BA
CK
L

Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.21), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.

Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds

Bi-amp connection

Combining with an external
power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier,
multichannel amplifier, etc.) to
build an extended system

Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room

Power-amp channel expansion

(Example)

Multi-zone configuration

(Example)

(Example)
External power
amplifier

Bi-amp
connection

Zone2

Main zone

■ Available speaker configurations

(RX-A2070)
Main zone

(RX-A3070)
Output
channel
(max)

Main zone
Output
channel
(max)

Bi-amp

External
speakers

External power
amplifier
(required)

Surround back

+1 room

7.2.2 +1Zone

+2 rooms

7.2 +2Zone

Rear presence

7.2.4 [ext.RP]

Front

7.2.4 [ext.Front]

Surround back
Surround back

Front presence

Page

7.2 +1Zone

Front presence

Power Amp Assign
(p.142)

+1 room

Surround back

Multi-zone

Front presence

Surround back
Surround back

Front presence

Surround back

)

Surround back

)

Front presence

)

Surround back

)

Surround back

)

Front presence

Front presence
Rear presence
Front
Front

+1 room
+2 rooms

+1 room
Front presence
Rear presence
Rear presence

7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP]

7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone

Multi-zone

Power Amp Assign
(p.142)

Page

+1 room

7.2 +1Zone

+1 room

7.2.2 +1Zone

+2 rooms

7.2 +2Zone

Front

+1 room

7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone

Front

+2 rooms

7.2 [ext.Front]
+2Zone

External power
amplifier
(required)

Surround back

Front presence

Surround back
Surround back

Front presence

Rear presence

External
speakers

Surround back

Surround back
11

Bi-amp

Surround back

)

Surround back

7.2 Bi-Amp

)

Front presence

5.2.2 Bi-Amp

)

Surround back

7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone

+1 room

Y
• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the
“Setup” menu (p.53).
• When applying a multi-zone configuration, you can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA

7.2 [ext.Front]
+2Zone

7.2 Bi-Amp

5.2.2 Bi-Amp

7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone

7.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.FP+RP]

5.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.RP]

SP 1-2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.142) in the “Setup” menu. The following explanation is based on the
assumption that you have not changed the default zone assignments.

7.2 +1Zone

7.2.2 +1Zone
E

1
9

2
9

5
6

7
Zone2

Zone2

Main zone

Speaker

5
6

Main zone

Connect to

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

(not used)

EXTRA SP 1

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 1

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

X
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.116), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

7.2 +2Zone

7.2.4 [ext.RP] (RX-A3070 only)

R
1

9
4

Zone2

4
6

7
1

via
external amp

Y
6

Main zone

via
external amp

Zone3

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP 1

R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

SUBWOOFER 1-2

When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external

When Zone3 output is enabled (p.116), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

amplifier for Zone3 (p.113).

7.2.4 [ext.Front] (RX-A3070 only)

7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP] (RX-A3070 only)

via external amp

R
via external amp

via external amp

2
3

Speaker

Y
6

via
external amp

Connect to

Speaker

via
external amp

Connect to

FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP 1

F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

EXTRA SP 2

R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

SUBWOOFER 1-2

When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external

When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting external

amplifier for Zone3 (p.113).

amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.113).

7.2.2 [ext.Front] +1Zone

7.2 [ext.Front] +2Zone

via external amp

E
1
9

2
9

5
6

Zone2

7
1

Zone2

Main zone

Main zone
Zone3

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP 1

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

7.2 Bi-Amp

5.2.2 Bi-Amp
Bi-amp

Bi-amp

E
1

2
3

Speaker

2
3

Connect to

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

(not used)

EXTRA SP 2

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1-2

7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone

7.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.FP+RP] (RX-A3070 only)
Bi-amp

Bi-amp

R
via external amp

via external amp

1
9

5
6

7
Zone2

via
external amp

Main zone

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

SUBWOOFER 1-2

When Zone2 output is enabled (p.116), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting external
amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.113).

5.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.RP] (RX-A3070 only)
Bi-amp

R
1

2
3

via
external amp

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

CENTER

SURROUND

(not used)

EXTRA SP 2

R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Y
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external
amplifier for Zone3 (p.113).

■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp
connections

■ Connecting Zone2/3 speakers

When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT

To utilize the EXTRA SP 1-2 terminals for Zone2/3 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign”

terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals.

setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.53).

When using Zone2/3 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP 1-2 terminals.

To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu

The unit (rear)

after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.53).

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

The unit (rear)

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

FRONT

EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE

SINGLE

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

FRONT

EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP

SINGLE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP

3
9

Zone2 or Zone3

9
1

Main zone

Zone2 or Zone3

• You can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1-2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.142)

The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals output the same signals.

in the “Setup” menu.
• You can also connect Zone2 and Zone3 speakers using an external amplifier (p.113).

Caution
Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.

■ Connecting an external power amplifier

(Example)

When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the input

Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier

jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are

PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks

output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

NETWORK
( 3 NET )

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

Main input jack

Caution

TRIGGER
OUT

NT VIDEO

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

MAIN IN

OUT

2
PB

RS-232C

PR
PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.

(FRONT)

– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

3/
NCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS
ROUND

– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume
of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the
unit) to the pre-main amplifier.

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

FRONT

R
FRONT

SUR

SINGLE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT

NETWORK
( 3 NET )

(HDCP2.2)

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

AC IN

AV 2

)

AV 3

AV 4

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 1

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

RS-232C

OUT

2
B

AV 2

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

CENTER

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

FRONT

EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

SINGLE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

a b c de

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP

The unit (rear)

a F.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3070 only)
Output front presence channel audio signals or Zone2 audio signals depending on the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.142).

About external power amplifiers
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.

b R.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3070 only)

• With unbalanced inputs

Output rear presence channel audio signals or Zone3 audio signals depending on the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.142).

• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)

c FRONT jacks

• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 Ω)

Output front channel sounds.

d SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.

e SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect the
external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).

f CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
En

Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
(such as A-S3000)

2 Connecting a TV and playback devices
Connect a TV and playback devices (video and audio devices) to the unit.
For information on how to connect a USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.99).

Input/output jacks and cables
The unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Prepare the cables that match the jacks on your devices.

■ Video/audio jacks

■ Video jacks

■ Audio jacks

To input/output video and audio signals, use the following

To input only video signals, use the following jacks.

To input/output only audio signals, use the following jacks.

jacks.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
HDMI jacks

OPTICAL jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three components:

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable.

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single

luminance (Y), chrominance blue (Pb), and chrominance red

Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable.

jack. Use an HDMI cable.

(Pr). Use a component video cable with three plugs.
Digital optical cable

AV 1

Component video cable

HDMI cable
O
T VIDE
ONEN
COMVP 1
PB
A

COAXIAL jacks

Y
Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a
cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation.

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable.

VIDEO jacks
Digital coaxial cable

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel
(ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features.

AV 1

Video pin cable

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
VIDEO

AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable
(RCA cable).
AUDIO3

Stereo pin cable

XLR jacks
Transmit analog audio signals. Use an XLR balanced cable.
Match the pins and insert the “male” connector of the XLR
balanced cable until you hear a click.
XLR balanced cable(male)
IO
AUD

X
When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the PUSH button
on the unit and then pull the connector out.

About the XLR jacks
The pin assignments for the XLR jacks of the unit are shown
below. Before connecting an XLR balanced cable, refer to the
instruction manual of your device and verify that its XLR
jacks are compatible with the pin assignments.

2. HOT

1. GND

3. COLD

Connecting a TV

• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:

Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power
and volume with the TV’s remote control.

■ HDMI connection

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin

on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.190).

cable).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.44).

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

HDMI OUT jack
HDMI OUT

The unit
(rear)

(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

ARC

HDMI

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

HDMI input

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 1

HDMI

VIDEO

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

AV 2

HDMI

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDIO

AUDIO 1
GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

(2 TV)

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

6 OPTICAL

AUDIO 4
R

SURROUND

FRONT

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

1 OPTICAL

OPTICAL
O

AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

■ Connecting another TV or a projector
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the

an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the

unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of

remote control (p.75).

the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has
an HDMI output jack.
HDMI

HDMI OUT 2 jack

HDMI OUT

The unit
(rear)

(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting

ARC

(p.158) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A, B), COAXIAL (3, 4, 5)
and OPTICAL (1, 2, 6) jacks to another input source.

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 1

If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be

VIDEO

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

AV 2

HDMI

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

AUDIO 4
R

determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.128) in the “Option” menu.

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

SURROUND

HDMI input

FRONT

HDMI

■ HDMI connection

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

The unit (rear)

HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks

Projector
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

I OUT

CP2.2)

1
ARC

TV (already connected)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 4

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

HDMI output

OUT

2
B

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

AV 2

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

HDMI
PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

HDMI
2

• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video
6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

FRONT

HDMI

CENTER

SPEAKERS

monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.114).

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

A
AM

SINGLE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

Video device

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-7 on the remote control, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from the unit.

■ Component video connection

■ Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial,

coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio

digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the

output jacks available on your video device.

audio output jacks available on your video device.

Output jacks on video device

Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit

Video

Input jacks on the unit

Audio

Video

Digital coaxial

AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)

Audio
Digital coaxial

AV 1-2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Component video
Composite video

AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
The unit (rear)

Digital optical

AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1-4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

The unit (rear)

PR
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

AV 1

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT

(1 BD/DVD

(HDCP2.2)

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 4

AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

AV 2

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

Video output
(composite video)

ZONE OU

VIDEO

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE

6 OPTICAL

E
R

AUDIO 4
R

Y
AUDIO 4
R

COM

CENTER

S
R

AUDIO 1

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

PHONO
L

PR
GND

AV 4

Video output
(component video)

AUDIO 1

AV 3

VIDEO

PHONO
L

AV 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO

AV 1-4 (VIDEO)
jacks

(1 BD/DVD)

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

SINGLE

C
C

COAXIAL

ZONE 2/Z

COAXIAL

Video device

L
L

AV 1-2 (COAXIAL) or
AV 1-2 (AUDIO) jacks

OPTICAL

R
R

Video device

Audio output
(digital coaxial or analog stereo)

Any of AV 1-2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1-4 (AUDIO) jacks

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-2 on the remote control, the video/audio played

Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-4 on the remote control, the video/audio played

back on the video device will be output from the unit.

X
To connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and a digital optical cable, use “Input
Assignment” (p.158) in the “Setup” menu to assign the COMPONENT VIDEO and OPTICAL jacks to the same input
source.

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Audio output
(PHONO)

PHONO jacks

PHONO

Connect audio devices such as CD players and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio

output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections.

L
R

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

Ground lead

GND

setting (p.158) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (3, 4, 5) and OPTICAL (1, 2,

The unit (rear)

GND

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

6) jacks to another input source.

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

• (RX-A3070 only)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 1

Turntable

VIDEO

Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your audio device and verify that its

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

AV 2

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.42).

COAXIAL
R

O
GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be

AUDIO 4
R

OPTICAL

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.128) in the “Option” menu.

SURROUND

FRONT

Audio output jacks on audio device
Digital coaxial

Audio device

Audio input jacks on the unit
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
XLR

Digital optical

AUDIO 1-2 (OPTICAL)
XLR

AV 1–4 (AUDIO [RCA])

XLR

Analog stereo (RCA)

AV 3 (OPTICAL)

AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO [RCA])

Analog stereo (XLR)

AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR]) (RX-A3070 only)

Turntable (PHONO)

PHONO

XLR

Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 (COAXIAL,
OPTICAL, AUDIO [RCA], AUDIO [XLR])
jacks

Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-4 or PHONO on the remote control,
the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
* AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR]) jack: RX-A3070 only

When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

■ Analog stereo connection
Connect a playback device (such as CD players) to the unit with a stereo pin cable.

Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
ENTER

Use the USB jack to connect a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting a USB storage

ZONE 2
RETURN

device” (p.99).

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO AUX

PHONES
USB

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

unit.

AUDIO

HDMI IN

The unit (front)

■ HDMI connection
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
ZONE 2
RETURN

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO AUX

PHONES
USB

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

AUDIO

HDMI IN

HDMI

Audio device

The unit (front)

If you select “VIDEO AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the audio played back on the
device will be output from the unit.

Game console

X
If you connect devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks, the unit outputs audio
input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.

Camcorder

If you select “VIDEO AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the
video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

Y
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2.

3 Connecting the radio antennas
Connect the supplied radio antenna to the unit.

Assembling the AM antenna

FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
FM antenna
AM antenna

Connecting the AM antenna
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

Hold down

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4
Y

AV 1

Insert

Release

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

VIDEO

2
B

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

AV 2

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

FRONT

CENTER

SPEAKERS
R

AUDIO 4
R

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

SINGLE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

The unit (rear)

DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.
DAB/FM antenna

The unit (rear)
AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 4

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 1

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

VIDEO

2
B

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

AV 2

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

FRONT

CENTER

SPEAKERS
R

AUDIO 4
R

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

ANTENNA
DAB/FM
(4 RADIO)
(4 RADIO)

L
75ȍ
75ȍ

SINGLE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

Y
• The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.

4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless

antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may
block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network

software or firewall settings appropriately.

Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

Connecting the network cable

Preparing the wireless antenna

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or
higher straight cable).

If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up straight.
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)

Internet

For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to
a network device wirelessly” (p.66).

WAN

LAN

Modem

PC
Network cable
The unit (rear)

Router
NETWORK
( 3 NET )

AV 6

AV 7

AC IN

Mobile device

TRIGGER
OUT
1
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

REMOTE
IN

RS-232C

OUT

Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.

X
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network
Connection” (p.152) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as
the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure
the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters
manually (p.152).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.162) in the “Information” menu.

5 Connecting other devices

6 Connecting the power cable

Connect a device compatible with the trigger function.

Before connecting the power cable (Brazil and General models only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are
AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger
function

Y
Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet.
Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard.

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such
as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a

The unit (rear)

system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by

NETWORK
( 3 NET )

AV 7

connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural mini-plug

AC IN

GGER
OUT
REMOTE

cable.

.1A
TAL

RS-232C

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

OUT

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

220V240V

TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks

The unit (rear)

Trigger In
(+12V)

Power amplifier
(such as MX-A5000)

110V120V
ERS

TRIGGER
OUT
DMI (HDCP2.2)

SP2
NCE

CENTER

FRONT

EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE

NETWORK
( 3 NET )

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

TRIGGER
OUT
1

REMOTE

RS-232C
F.PRESENCE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

OUT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then

CENTER

SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

FRONT

to an AC wall outlet.

SINGLE

The unit (rear)
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

NETWORK

System
connector
jack

( 3 NET )

AC IN

Yamaha
subwoofer

OTE

RS-232C

To an AC wall outlet

OUT

X
You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.159) in the “Setup”
menu.

CENTER

FRONT

EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP

7 Selecting an on-screen menu language
SOURCE

RECEIVER

RECEIVER z
AV

V-AUX

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.

1
2

AUDIO

PHONO

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English, Japanese,

cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language.
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video

SCENE

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the

from the unit.

ZONE

If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

3
4

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

The information on the front display is provided in English only.

PRESET

MOVIE

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

6
7

TV CH
CODE SET

8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings
SOURCE

RECEIVER

RECEIVER z
AV

V-AUX

If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the
procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings

manually before performing YPAO.
1

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

• When using any of advanced speaker configurations, select
“Power Amp Assign” (p.142), then select your speaker system.

• Advanced speaker configuration (p.30)

AUDIO

• When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system

• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual

(Virtual CINEMA FRONT), select “Configuration” ! “Layout” !

CINEMA FRONT) (p.24)

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

HDMI OUT

“Surround” (p.143), then select “Front”.

• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback (p.26)

ZONE

• When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

1
2

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

playback, select “Configuration” ! “Layout” ! “Front
Presence” (p.144), then select your front presence speaker

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video

layout.

from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

If you are using the rear presence speakers, also select its layout

in “Rear Presence”.

If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

3
4
5

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker” and
then “Manual Setup”.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

Configure the corresponding speaker settings.

TV CH
CODE SET

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
SOURCE

RECEIVER

RECEIVER z
AV

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your

MAIN 2 3 4

connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.

settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your

X
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your

ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the

The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)

ZONE

PROGRAM

MUTE

tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.

technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed

SCENE

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and

listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker
room.
TUNER

YPAO MIC
jack

for acoustic perfection.

VOLUME

YPAO MIC

Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
TOP MENU

– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.

OPTION

– Keep the room as quiet as possible.
ENTER

– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become
an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.

RETURN

DISPLAY

The unit (front)

RETURN

– Do not connect headphones.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

1
2

MUTE

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video

YPAO
5
microphone

from the unit.

INPUT
TV VOL

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Ear height

If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network

TV CH
CODE SET

setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

The following screen appears on the TV.

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the
crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.
VOLUME

MIN

MAX

CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT

MIN

MAX

X
To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the
measurement.
En

5
SOURCE

RECEIVER

If desired, select the measuring options.

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.56) or
“Angle/Height” (p.57) and press ENTER.

AUDIO

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

Y
If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate external

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

devices. In this case, press RECEIVER and then use the cursor keys.

ZONE

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the

SCENE

measurement.
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.60)

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.57)

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

Multi Position

Single measure

Multi measure
(5 listening positions)

Selects multi measure or single measure.

e
bac

Settings

Yes

Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others
to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different
positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area
defined by those positions (multi measure).

No (default)

Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the
measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit
that position (single measure).

X
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a
wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated
most frequently.

Multi measure
(1 listening position +
front/back/left/right)

Multi measure
(2 listening positions +
front/back)

b
c a e
d

c
a b
d

Angle/Height
SOURCE

Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)

Enables/disables the angle/height measurement.

RECEIVER

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for

V-AUX

measurement. It takes about 5 minutes to perform the measurement.

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Y
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see
“Error messages” (p.64) or “Warning messages” (p.65).

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV.

ZONE
SCENE

Settings
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

“Measure” and press ENTER.

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Yes

Enables the angle/height measurement. The unit will
measure angle of each speaker and height of the presence
speakers at the listening position, and correct the speaker
parameters so that CINEMA DSP can create more effective
sound fields.

No (default)

Disables the angle/height measurement.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

X
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

finishes.
(when angle/height measurement is disabled)

MUSIC

Proceed to Step 3.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

start the measurement immediately.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to

The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement

BAND
MODE

TUNING

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select

TV CH
CODE SET

(when angle/height measurement is enabled)
Proceed to Step 2.
SOURCE

Place the microphone base at the listening position and set the
YPAO microphone to the position “1”.

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

Microphone
base

ZONE
SCENE

2
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

Perform the angle/height measurement.

Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

2
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.

Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole

DISPLAY

BAND
MODE

TUNING

• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.

PRESET

Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.

Microphone base

Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.

In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

positions “2” and “3”.

Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.

SOURCE

To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys
(e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

VOLUME

To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

RETURN

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to
enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

TV VOL

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press
ENTER.

X
To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking
the measurement results” (p.63).

INPUT

MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.125) in the
“Option” menu.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
En

Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
SOURCE

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

TUNER

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening

When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the

positions.

following screen appears automatically.

(when angle/height measurement is disabled)

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see

MAIN 2 3 4

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

Proceed to Step 5.

“Error messages” (p.64) or “Warning messages” (p.65).

ZONE

When the measurements at the positions you want to
measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select
“CANCEL” and press ENTER.

RECEIVER

• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV.

VOLUME

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Measure” and press ENTER.

TOP MENU

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

start the measurement immediately.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at

BAND
MODE

TUNING

(when angle/height measurement is enabled)

To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

PRESET

the first position finishes.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position
and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to
8) have been taken.

Proceed to Step 4.

4
SOURCE

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Perform the angle/height measurement.

Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.

Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.
Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.

AUDIO

Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Place the microphone base at the listening position you will be
seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.

Microphone base

Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.

position “1”.

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Microphone
base

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

Y
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.

The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.

5
SOURCE

ENTER.

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking

TUNER

To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to
select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

DISPLAY

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to
enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).

the measurement results” (p.63).

AUDIO

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

MAIN 2 3 4

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press

TV CH
CODE SET

X
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.125) in the
“Option” menu.

Checking the measurement results
SOURCE

Angle
Horizontal angle of each speaker at the listening position
(Horizontal)

You can check the YPAO measurement results.

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Height

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Result” and press ENTER.

AUDIO

Height of the presence speakers above the level of the
listening position

To finish checking the results and return to the previous
screen, press RETURN.

X
You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu,

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

which displays the previous measurement results.

ZONE

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

The following screen appears.

SCENE

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and
PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

c
a Measurement result items

MODE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

b Measurement result details
c The number of measured positions (when multi measure is
performed)

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press
ENTER.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”,
and then “Result” (p.138).

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

BAND

TUNING

Use the cursor keys to select an item.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

Polarity of each speaker

TV CH
CODE SET

Wiring

Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)

Size

Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.

Distance

Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level

Output level adjustment for each speaker

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Error message

Cause

Remedy

E-1: No Front SP

Front speakers are not detected.

E-2: No Sur. SP

One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.

E-3: No F.PRNS SP

One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.

E-4: SBR → SBL

A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5: Noisy

The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”,
YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.

E-6: Check Sur.

Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers
are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions
to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7: No MIC

The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.

E-8: No Signal

The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

E-9: User Cancel

The measurement has been canceled.

Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.

E-10: Internal Error

An internal error has occurred.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

E-11: No R.PRNS SP

One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.

Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Warning message

Cause

Remedy
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.63) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:

W-1: Out of Phase

A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-).

Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

W-2: Over Distance

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.

Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.63) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the
listening position.

W-3: Level Error

There are significant volume differences between the speakers.

Select “Level” in “Result” (p.63) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage
environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using
the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.

10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.

Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.12) to control the

Selecting the connection method

unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.

Select a connection method according to your network environment.

■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the

Mobile device
(such as iPhone)

unit.

The unit

For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless

Internet

Direct)” (p.72).
Wireless router

Y
• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.50) or the wireless
network connection (p.67).

Modem

• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the both the unit and mobile device cannot be connected to the Internet. In
this case, you cannot use the Internet services such as Internet radio. To use the Internet services, terminate
the Wireless Direct connection on the mobile device.

Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
The unit

For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.67).

Y
You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with Wireless Direct (p.72).

Connecting the unit to a wireless network
SOURCE

There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network.

RECEIVER

RECEIVER z
AV

V-AUX

• Using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.74)

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Select a connection method according to your environment.

• Sharing the iOS device setting (p.67)

• Using other connection methods (p.69)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
(Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

SCENE

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Connection” and press ENTER.

ZONE

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

• Using the WPS push button configuration (p.68)

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

4
5
6

■ Sharing the iOS device setting

You can easily set up a wireless connection by applying the connection
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).
ON SCREEN

wireless router.

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a

Y
If you set up a wireless connection with this method, the following settings will be
initialized.

BAND

– Network settings

MODE

TUNING

The checkmark indicates the current setting.

PRESET

– Bluetooth settings
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

– USB and network items registered as shortcuts

MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

– Account information for the network services

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

– Internet radio stations register to “Favorites”

TV VOL
MUTE

Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.

• You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later. (The following procedure is a setup example

INPUT
TV CH
CODE SET

for iOS 8.)
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.

1
2

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Y
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Share

Press ON SCREEN.
En

9
SOURCE

After checking the on-screen message, use the cursor
keys (e/r) and ENTER to select “NEXT”.

RECEIVER

RECEIVER z
AV

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

■ Using the WPS push button configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS
button.

Y
This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access

AUDIO

point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.

1
2

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

10 On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in

VOLUME

the Wi-Fi screen.
TOP MENU

OPTION

RETURN

Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
connection method.

BAND
MODE

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

The name of the unit

11 Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”.
Tap here to start setup

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

the front display.

DISPLAY

TUNING

“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds.

point).

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

TV CH
CODE SET

The network currently selected

When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to
the selected network (access point).

About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.

■ Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button
SOURCE

RECEIVER

RECEIVER z
2

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

1
2

AUDIO

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

SCENE

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video

Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

Cursor keys
ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

MUSIC

3
4
5
6

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

WPS Button

You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button
while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions
displayed on the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)

See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.67).

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Access Point Scan

You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an
access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an
access point” (p.70).

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO

Manual Setting

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
(Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
PIN Code

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

The following connection methods are available.

unit via HDMI.

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

desired connection method and select “NEXT”.

from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

ZONE

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the

wireless network settings.

configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the

TV CH
CODE SET

X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.

You can set up a wireless connection by entering the
required information (such as SSID) manually.
For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless
connection manually” (p.70).
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s
PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The
method is available if the wireless router (access point)
supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings,
see “Using the PIN code” (p.71).

Searching for an access point
SOURCE

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit

If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless

starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available

connection setting screen appears on the TV.

access points appears on the TV screen.

You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and

AUDIO

Setting up the wireless connection manually

security key for your network.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired

access point and select “NEXT”.

MAIN 2 3 4

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the
access point and select “NEXT”.

The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

TUNER

ZONE

SCENE

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
and select “NEXT”.

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

TUNING

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
security method of the access point and select “NEXT”.

BAND
MODE

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the TV screen.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another

TV CH
CODE SET

connection method.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode

3
SOURCE

Using the PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available

and select “NEXT”.

RECEIVER

access points appears on the TV screen.

If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key

V-AUX

to Step 4.
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
access point and select “NEXT”.

hexadecimal digits.

The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.

If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

64 hexadecimal digits.

HDMI OUT

ZONE
SCENE

Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point).

For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

wireless router (access point).

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

OPTION

press ENTER to start the connection process.
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on

the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another

press ENTER to start the connection process.

PRESET

connection method.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

the TV screen.
3

If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)
SOURCE

V-AUX

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.

AUDIO

PHONO

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
Direct” and select “OK”.

RECEIVER

RECEIVER z
1

Y
Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly
encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

to the unit without permission.

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
desired security method and select “NEXT”.

Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the

Cursor keys
ENTER

RETURN

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

unit via HDMI.

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

1
2

TV CH
CODE SET

3
4
5
6

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Settings
None, WPA2-PSK (AES)

Connection” and press ENTER.

Y
If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication
is not encrypted.

9
SOURCE

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.

and select “NEXT”.

For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the

If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available. Proceed

instruction manual of the mobile device.

to Step 10.

Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.

Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available

Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.

AUDIO

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key

access points.

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

ENTER to save the setting.
The settings made appear on the TV screen.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in Step 10.

TV CH
CODE SET

The SSID and security key information is required for setup of a
mobile device.

11 Connecting to the MusicCast network
SOURCE

RECEIVER

RECEIVER z
AV

V-AUX

MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha,
allowing you to share music among all of your rooms with a variety of
devices. You can enjoy music from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and
music streaming service anywhere in your house with one easy-to-use

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

HDMI OUT

ZONE

your mobile device and tap “Setup”.

• Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the

If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the
network, tap “Settings” and then “Add New Device”.

room and play them back simultaneously.
MUTE

• Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
following the on screen instructions, then hold down
CONNECT on the front panel of the unit for 5 seconds.

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on

products, visit the Yamaha website.

• Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different
PROGRAM

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast compatible

dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

SCENE

1
2

streaming services may differ depending on your region and product.)

OPTION

MusicCast CONTROLLER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

CONNECT

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

following the onscreen instructions to set up the network.

To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you
need the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the
operation. Search for the free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on

INPUT

Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application

Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application to
playback.

the App Store or Google Play and install it to your device.

Y
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network
Follow the procedure below to add the unit to the MusicCast network.
You can also configure the unit’s wireless settings at once.

• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When Pure Direct is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB
cannot be delivered.
• If you configure the unit’s wireless settings with this method, the signal strength
indicator of the front display lights up when the unit is connecting to a network (even
if a wired connection is used).
• You can interlock the power of MusicCast devices with the power of the unit

• The SSID and security key for your network will be needed.

(MusicCast master). For details, see “MusicCast Link Power Interlock” (p.154) in the

• If your router supports multiple SSID’s (network names), connect the mobile device
to the first access point (“SSID 1”, etc.).

“Setup” menu.

PLAYBACK
SOURCE

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Basic playback procedure

AUDIO

Input selection keys

On-screen input selection

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD
a Press ON SCREEN.

player) connected to the unit.

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

HDMI OUT

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

VOLUME

2
3

Use the input selection keys to select an input source.

ENTER.

Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

OPTION

For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
Cursor keys

ENTER

pages.

ENTER
RETURN

signal output changes.

PRESET

MUSIC

only) (p.88)

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

HDMI OUT Sel.
OUT 1+2

• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
only) (p.93)

OUT 1+2

• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.97)

TV VOL

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.99)

TV CH

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and
HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

OUT 1

INPUT

MUTE

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for

Russia models) (p.84)

MODE

TUNING

• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and

DISPLAY
BAND

MOVIE

c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press

Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
OUT 2

CODE SET

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.103)

Off

Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

• Listening to Internet radio (p.107)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.110)

X
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.76).

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution
supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have

connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack,

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL
on the front panel (p.125).

the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.157), you can turn on/off each
zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SOURCE

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.

RECEIVER

You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode.

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

Press SCENE.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

SCENE (SCENE key)

SCENE

HDMI Output

AV 1

AUDIO 1

NET RADIO

TUNER

Audio Select (p.128)

Auto

HDMI Output (p.75)

OUT 1+2

DSP Program (p.78)

Sci-Fi

STRAIGHT

9ch Stereo

Pure Direct Mode (p.148)

Auto

Enhancer (p.83)

Off

Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.127)

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

Mode

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

X
You can select SCENE 1-4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control. Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5-12) and select those scenes from the “Scene” menu (p.132).

On-screen scene selection

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

Input (p.75)
Input
ON SCREEN

TV CH
CODE SET

a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER.

Registering a scene
SOURCE
SOURCE

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and
sound program) that you want to assign to a scene.

AUDIO

Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments

Input selection keys

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete”
appears on the front display.

In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output and
Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the scene
assignments in “Detail” (p.133) in the “Scene” menu.
Sound

Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC, Extra Bass

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue Level,
Subwoofer Trim

Video

Video Mode, Video Adjustment

Volume

Master Volume

Lipsync

Lipsync, Delay

Speaker Setup

Setting Pattern, PEQ Select

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

SCENE1
SET Complete

HDMI OUT

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

SCENE

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

If you want to control the corresponding playback device
after selecting the scene, hold down the corresponding
SCENE key and input selection key together for more than
3 seconds.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

VOL.

OPTION

ENTER

Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.
RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.169) to register it.

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

X
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device
connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device
type in “Device Control” (p.133) in the “Scene” menu.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

X
When the input source is TUNER, USB or NET, the selected radio station or content is
assigned.

Selecting the sound mode
SOURCE

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround

RECEIVER

decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback).

On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.

AUDIO

Selecting a sound program suitable for movies

c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder
and press ENTER.

• Press MOVIE repeatedly.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing

HDMI OUT

ZONE

video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.79).

SCENE

X
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing

PROGRAM.

Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

PROGRAM

ON SCREEN

OPTION

• Press MUSIC repeatedly.

• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the
“DSP Program” menu (p.135).

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

music sources or stereo playback (p.80).

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.15) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

• Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly.

DISPLAY
BAND

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Precaution for enjoying Dolby Atmos®

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from

MODE

TUNING

the “Information” menu (p.161).

Selecting a surround decoder

MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT

2-channel sources (p.82).

• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus in
the following situations. (Dolby Atmos PCM format is always decoded as
Dolby Atmos.)
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.

Switching to the straight decode mode

– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).

• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels

• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.81) does not work.

(p.82).

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

Switching to the Pure Direct mode

Precaution for enjoying DTS:X™

• Press PURE DIRECT.

• When DTS:X contents are played back, you can adjust the volume of dialogue
sounds in “DTS Dialogue Control” (p.126) in the “Option” menu.

This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.83).
Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and
breadth (p.83).

• When the DTS:X decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as
Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.81) does not work.

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV
programs, and games.

MOVIE THEATER

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP HD3). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without
disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio. Its design is
based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions.
It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and
boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds
to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest
Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created
virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects,
and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on
reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space
expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and
powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the
separation of the channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie
genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are
modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are
reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the
dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an
atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space
with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original
audio.

Enhanced

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the dynamic sound transition
of 3D object audio. Its design is based on the concept of a movie theater with
multi-top speakers, in which the audience is overwhelmed by the natural and
powerful sound effects.

theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.
Sound program category

MUSIC
HD 3

CLASSICAL
Hall in Vienna

VOL.
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SR

Sound program
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up

X
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.148) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend
using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence
speakers for further spatial sounds).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers.
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected, the
unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the
rear sound field.
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)

ENTERTAINMENT

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and
light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices
are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is
realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a
suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games.
The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are
right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic
and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds
depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background
music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more
spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you
were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to
the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that
emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that
reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of
an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic
positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is
relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the
inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of
opera entertainment.

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.

CLASSICAL

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that
uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread
richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center
left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox
shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich
sound.

Hall in Amsterdam

The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.

Church in Freiburg

Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed
tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling
enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus,
the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of
the church.

Church in
Royaumont

This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a
beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of
Paris.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience
hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly
music and chamber music.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

LIVE/CLUB
Village Vanguard

The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling
makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center.

Warehouse Loft

The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete
walls clearly with a lot of energy.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey
atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you
feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los
Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous
New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) when no surround
speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to
reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound
field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to
enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.

X
When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you

STEREO

can place them in the front (p.24) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output
from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

9ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then
outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field
and is ideal for background music at parties.

CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the
virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
with the 5 speakers placed in the front.

X
When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)

CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.79) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.81) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “9ch Stereo” is selected.

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo
headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound
program or a surround decoder.

Enjoying unprocessed playback
SOURCE

Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes.

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect

RECEIVER

processing.

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

SUR. DECODE
†‡ Dsur

■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)

AUDIO

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

HDMI OUT

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

Press STRAIGHT.

bDsur

Uses the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for your
speaker layout. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content) is
played.

Neural:X

Uses the DTS Neural:X decoder suitable for your
speaker layout. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as DTS:X content) is
played.

Neo:6 Cinema

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.

Neo:6 Music

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled
TOP MENU

or disabled.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

STRAIGHT

ENTER

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND
MODE

TUNING

SUR.DECODE

PRESET

speakers are used, select a surround decoder (p.82).

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

STRAIGHT

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back

TV CH
CODE SET

• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA
FRONT (p.81) works when multichannel source is played back.

■ Playing back in extended multichannel
(surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel or multichannel sources.

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Uses the decoder automatically selected by input
source. The DTS Neural:X decoder is selected for DTS
sources and the Dolby Surround decoder is selected
for other sources.

produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources.

VOL.

Auto

sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and

ZONE

Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder.

Y
• If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back speaker is
used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except when a Dolby
Atmos content or a DTS:X content is played).
• When the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder is selected, virtual surround

processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.81) does not work.

• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and
the selected decode type (p.136).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.184).

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(Pure Direct)
SOURCE

RECEIVER

When Pure Direct is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with

V-AUX

the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other
circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

quality.

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound,

MUTE

TOP MENU

it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound

PURE DIRECT
PROGRAM

allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before

Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, Pure Direct is enabled or disabled.

SCENE

In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when

“Hi-Res Mode” (p.127) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default).

POP-UP/MENU

When Pure Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.

OPTION

– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs

ENTER

modes.

VOL.
L

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

Playing back digitally compressed formats
(such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer)

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is

– Operating the on-screen menu and “Option” menu
RETURN

Press ENHANCER.
enabled or disabled.

DISPLAY

– Using the multi-zone function

BAND

– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

Enhancer On

MODE

TUNING

PRESET
Hi-Res ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

“ENHANCER” lights up

PURE DIRECT
3

ENHANCER

Y
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.

– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

– DSD audio

CODE SET

X
You can also use “Enhancer” (p.127) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.

Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio

Setting the frequency steps

stations.
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)

At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation

on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.

of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.S.A. model.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas.

1
2

Set the unit to standby mode.
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”.

TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9

4
5

Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.

Selecting a frequency for reception
SOURCE

1
2

RECEIVER

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

FM 87.50MHz

MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

preset numbers.

VOL.

You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using

HDMI OUT

“Auto Preset” (p.96).

ZONE

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for

■ Registering a radio station

about a second to search stations automatically.

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

OPTION

FM 98.50MHz

ENTER
STEREO TUNED

RETURN

tune into the desired radio station.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

TUNING

PRESET

PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

TUNING

MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty

Y
X

CODE SET

(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
number.
Preset number

You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “FM Mode” (p.128) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an

TV CH

Hold down MEMORY for seconds.

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

“Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range.
Numeric keys
MEMORY

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
BAND

MODE

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.85) to

VOL.

DISPLAY
BAND

MUTE

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their

Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).

TUNER

Registering favorite radio stations
(presets)

FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.

Preset
STEREO TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

Preset
STEREO TUNED

01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
SOURCE

RECEIVER

1
2

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the

TUNER

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

HDMI OUT

numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

ZONE
SCENE

Preset

STEREO TUNED

PROGRAM

MUTE

01:FM 98.50MHz

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

VOLUME

Y
TOP MENU

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.96).

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Numeric keys

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

Operating the radio on the TV
SOURCE

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

TUNER

c
b

■ Playback screen

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

■ Browse screen

a Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.

VOLUME

b Preset number
c Operation menu

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

a Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band
(FM/AM) and frequency.

MODE

TUNING

b TUNED/STEREO indicators

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Submenu
Memory
Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio stations
with strong signals (up to 40 stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the
list.

Clear All Preset

Clear all the preset stations.

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

Utility

c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Function
Registers the current station to the preset
number selected in the list.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

1 Page Up

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).

1 Page Down

Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.

CODE SET

Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models only)
SOURCE

RECEIVER

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound

V-AUX

and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also

receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations

AUDIO

using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which has a more efficient
TUNER

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

perform an initial scan.

1
2

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
The following message appears on the front panel if you have not

SCENE

Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to

HDMI OUT

ZONE

transmission method.

Preparing the DAB tuning

performed an initial scan yet.

• The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.

Init Scan
Press [ENTER]

• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being
PROGRAM

MUTE

covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check

VOLUME

WorldDMB online at http://www.worlddab.org/.
TOP MENU
ON
SCREEN

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

Press ENTER to start an initial scan.

For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.48).

Init Scan
>>>------- 30%

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

TUNING

VOL.

When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the

BAND
MODE

VOL.

first DAB radio station as stored in station order.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

DAB

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

X
• If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1

TV VOL

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

INPUT

MUTE

BBC Radio 4

appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again.

TV CH
CODE SET

• You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.91).
• To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored,
select “Init Scan” (p.124) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan
again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will
be cleared.

Selecting a DAB radio station for reception
SOURCE

You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial

RECEIVER

scan.

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

TUNER

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

HDMI OUT

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

1
2
3

You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.

BAND
PRESET

DAB 2

PRESET

TUNING
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception”
(p.89) to tune into the desired DAB radio station.

BBC National

Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,

VOL.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

SLEEP

Secondary station

BAND

TUNING

Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.

available.

DISPLAY

INFO

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

• When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.

MODE

MUSIC

■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets
VOL.

• “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not

ENTER

MOVIE

BBC Radio 4
Daily Service

OPTION

RETURN

preset numbers.

Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station.

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their

Press BAND to select the DAB band.

DAB

POP-UP/MENU

Registering favorite DAB radio stations
(presets)

each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
number.

You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
5

MEMORY
10

ENT

Preset number

selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.128) in the “Option” menu.
MEMORY

Preset

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

01:BBC Radio 4
Preset OK

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.

“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)

Preset

02:Empty
BBC Radio 4

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station

Displaying the DAB information

Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number.
SOURCE

The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

AUDIO

TUNER

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

HDMI OUT

SCENE

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio

into a DAB radio station.

1
2

Tune into the desired DAB radio station.
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

station.

ZONE

1
2
3

Info
Program Type

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the

numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

PRESET:01

VOLUME

Item name

• “No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.

ENTER

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the
displayed item appears.

OPTION

DAB

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
RETURN

DISPLAY

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Information

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO
3

Classic FM
Classic Music

X
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.87).

MOVIE

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

VOL.

DLS
(Dynamic Label
Segment)

Information on the current station

Ensemble Label

Ensemble name

Program Type

Station genre

Date And Time

Current date and time

Audio Mode

Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate

CH Label/Freq.

Channel label and frequency

Signal Quality

Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])

DSP Program

Sound mode name

Audio Decoder

Decoder name

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

X
Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio
station.

Checking reception strength of each DAB
channel label
SOURCE

RECEIVER

You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to

V-AUX

100 [best]).

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

TUNER

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

1
2
3
4
5

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Tune AID” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired DAB
channel label.

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

Tune AID
12B Level: 80

DISPLAY
BAND

BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

DAB channel label

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Reception strength

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

■ DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
Frequency

Channel label

Frequency

Channel label

174.928 MHz

225.648 MHz

12B

176.640 MHz

227.360 MHz

12C

178.352 MHz

229.072 MHz

12D

180.064 MHz

230.784 MHz

13A

181.936 MHz

232.496 MHz

13B

183.648 MHz

234.208 MHz

13C

185.360 MHz

235.776 MHz

13D

187.072 MHz

237.488 MHz

13E

188.928 MHz

239.200 MHz

13F

190.640 MHz

192.352 MHz

194.064 MHz

195.936 MHz

197.648 MHz

199.360 MHz

201.072 MHz

202.928 MHz

204.640 MHz

206.352 MHz

208.064 MHz

209.936 MHz

10A

211.648 MHz

10B

213.360 MHz

10C

215.072 MHz

10D

216.928 MHz

11A

218.640 MHz

11B

220.352 MHz

11C

222.064 MHz

11D

223.936 MHz

12A

Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
SOURCE

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting

RECEIVER

from registered radio stations.

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

AUDIO

If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the DAB/FM

You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have

antennas.

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.

TUNER

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Selecting a frequency for reception

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

1
2

POP-UP/MENU

“Auto Preset” (p.96).

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

■ Registering a radio station

Press BAND to select the FM band.

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

FM 87.50MHz

OPTION

VOL.

ENTER

RETURN

BAND

TUNING

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.93) to
tune into the desired radio station.

DISPLAY

MODE

X
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

Registering favorite FM radio stations
(presets)

PRESET

Use the following keys to set a frequency.

Hold down MEMORY for seconds.

PRESET

TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for

TUNING

about a second to search stations automatically.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select

station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,

98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

MEMORY
10

ENT

Numeric keys
MEMORY

(unused) preset number after the most recently registered

FM 98.50MHz

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

STEREO TUNED

CODE SET

number.

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

Preset number

Preset

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

Y
“Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range.

STEREO TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into

the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then

You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “FM Mode” (p.128) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an

press MEMORY again.

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.

Preset
STEREO TUNED

01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Radio Data System tuning

■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
SOURCE

(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)

RECEIVER

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

TUNER

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

1
2
3

HDMI OUT

SCENE

many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System
data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text” and

Press BAND to select the FM band

“Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the

numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
PROGRAM

MUTE

Preset

VOLUME

STEREO TUNED

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in

station.

ZONE

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

01:FM 98.50MHz

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information

station.

OPTION

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

ENTER

We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.96).

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
RETURN

Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting

DISPLAY

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

X
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.96).

MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO
STEREO TUNED

Numeric keys

TV VOL

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Item name

INPUT

MUTE

Info
Program Type

TV CH

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the

CODE SET

displayed item appears.
Frequency (always displayed)

STEREO TUNED

FM 98.50MHz
CLASSICS
Information

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

SOURCE

RECEIVER

Operating the radio on the TV

Program Service

Program service name

Program Type

Current program type

Radio Text

Information on the current program

Clock Time

Current time

DSP Program

Sound mode name

Audio Decoder

Decoder name

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

TUNER

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.

■ Playback screen

Y
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service.

仮画面

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

a Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band
(DAB/FM) and frequency.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)

PRESET

When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.94), the Radio
Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text”
and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

b TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

c Operation menu

CODE SET

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

■ Browse screen
SOURCE

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

a Preset station list

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.

b Preset number

VOLUME

c Operation menu
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

Submenu

Function

Memory

Registers the current station to the preset
number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio stations
with strong signals (up to 40 stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the
list.

Clear All Preset

Clear all the preset stations.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Utility

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

1 Page Up
1 Page Down

Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.

Y
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.

Playing back music via Bluetooth
SOURCE

You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as

RECEIVER

smartphones) on the unit. Also, you can enjoy audio played back on the

V-AUX

unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Playing back Bluetooth device music on the
unit
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and

BLUETOOTH

play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit.

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

The unit

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)

Y
The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.

VOLUME

Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input
source.

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

The unit

ENTER

RETURN

the unit) from the available device list.
Bluetooth speakers/
headphones

DISPLAY

A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be
made.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of

If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.

• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.154) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You cannot make Bluetooth connections to a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones)
and Bluetooth speakers/headphones at the same time.

On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is

• Stand the wireless antenna upright for connecting to a Bluetooth device wirelessly.

displayed on the TV.

For details, see “Preparing the wireless antenna” (p.50).

For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”

• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically
connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth

(p.188).

connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Setup menu items” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.

Enjoying audio using Bluetooth
speakers/headphones
SOURCE

V-AUX

Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between Bluetooth speakers/headphones and the unit, and enjoy audio

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

RECEIVER

Input selection keys

played back on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

TUNER

• To use this function, set “Transmitter” (p.155) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

2
3

Use the input selection keys (except BLUETOOTH) to

select an input source.

The checkmark indicates the Bluetooth device currently selected.

Press ON SCREEN.

While the Bluetooth speakers/headphones are in the
pairing mode, use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Setup” !
“Bluetooth” ! “Audio Send” ! “Device Search” and
“OK”.

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

The list of available Bluetooth devices (BD addresses) is displayed.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

When the connection process finishes, audio played back on the

TV CH
CODE SET

unit will be reproduced from the Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

X
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform the disconnect operation on the
Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

Y
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, input sources other than the network sources
and USB cannot be delivered.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.

Connecting a USB storage device

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format).

For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.188).

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
The unit (front)
(CONNECT)

PROGRAM
ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

PHONES
USB

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

USB storage device

USB
Connected

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

X
If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears
in the front display.

Y
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables.
• The unit cannot charge USB devices while it is in standby mode.

Playback of USB storage device contents
SOURCE

RECEIVER

V-AUX

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is

and start playback.

displayed.

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the
TV screen.

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

USB

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen,

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

hold down RETURN.
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by

displayed.

PRESET

selecting the shortcut numbers (p.118).

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

TV CH
CODE SET

100

■ Browse screen
SOURCE

a
b
c

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

■ Playback screen
a
b
c

AUDIO

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

PROGRAM

MUTE

a Status indicators

SCENE

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.102) and playback status (such as
play/pause).

b Playback information

b List name

VOLUME

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

c Contents list
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

BAND
MODE

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.102) and playback status (such as
play/pause).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

d Item number/total
e Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

X
You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote

10 Pages Up
10 Pages Down
Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

101

control to control playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage
SOURCE

device contents.

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

SCENE

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

ZONE

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.

AUDIO

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

OPTION

Item

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

BAND
MODE

TUNING

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

PRESET

Setting
Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Repeat
(Repeat)

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

Function

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

102

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.50). You can check whether

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing

the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network Connection”

settings.

(p.152) in the “Information” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network
connection.

X
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.188).

Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure
the media sharing setting on each music server.

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
The setting procedure may vary depending on the PC and Windows Media Player version (The
following procedure is a setup example for Windows Media Player 12).

1
2
3
4
5

Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name.
Click “OK” to exit.

X
For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.

103

Playback of PC music contents
SOURCE

RECEIVER

V-AUX

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is

playback.

displayed.

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

NET

source.

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen, hold down

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

during playback, playback stops automatically.

If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the

MODE

TUNING

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

BAND

PRESET

playback screen is displayed.

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press
ENTER.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.118).

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

TV CH
CODE SET

104

■ Browse screen
SOURCE

a
b
c

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

■ Playback screen
a
b
c

AUDIO

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

PROGRAM

MUTE

a Status indicators

SCENE

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.106) and playback status (such as
play/pause).

b Playback information

b List name

VOLUME

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

c Contents list
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

BAND
MODE

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.106) and playback status (such as
play/pause).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

d Item number/total
e Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

Function

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up

TV VOL
MUTE

• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

INPUT

10 Pages Down

TV CH

X
playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).

CODE SET

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.131).

105

■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
SOURCE

music content.

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

SCENE

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

ZONE

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.

AUDIO

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

OPTION

Item

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

BAND
MODE

TUNING

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

PRESET

Setting
Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Repeat
(Repeat)

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

Function

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

106

Listening to Internet radio
SOURCE

You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

RECEIVER

Playback of Internet radio

V-AUX

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.50). You can check

whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

AUDIO

NET

source.

the unit in “Network” (p.152) in the “Information” menu.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

HDMI OUT

• The unit uses the airable.Radio service. airable is a service of Tune In GmbH.

ZONE

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

SCENE

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input

• Folder names are different depending on the language.
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

MODE

TUNING

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the

BAND

PRESET

playback screen is displayed.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.118).

107

■ Browse screen
SOURCE

a
b
c

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

■ Playback screen
a
b
c

AUDIO

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE
SCENE

a Playback indicator

b List name

b Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

c Contents list
PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

d Item number/total

OPTION

e Operation menu
ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

c Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Function

Add to favorites

Adds the current station to the “Favorites” folder (p.109).

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

BAND

MODE

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Add to favorites
(Remove from
favorites)

Function
Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from the
“Favorites” folder (p.109).

1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down

TV VOL
MUTE

10 Pages Up

TV CH

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

CODE SET

• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop
playback.

INPUT

10 Pages Down
Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

108

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites)
SOURCE

By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Favorites”, you

RECEIVER

can quickly access to them from the “Favorites” folder in the browse

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

screen.

AUDIO

You can also register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth input
source as shortcuts (p.118).

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

screen or start playback of it to display the playback
screen.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse

Press the cursor key (r) to select “Add to favorites” and
press ENTER.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

The selected station is added to the “Favorites” folder.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

Radio stations registered to favorites are displayed with “S”.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Browse screen

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

X
To remove a station that is registered to favorites, select the station and then select
“Remove from favorites”.

109

Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

iTunes

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.

(wired or wireless)

Router

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen
on the iPod.

The unit

If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon appears.
iTunes (example)

(wired or wireless)

iPhone/iPad/iPod touch

iOS 10 (example)

Y
If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.162) in the

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network
name of the unit) as the audio output device.

“Information” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect.

Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.

• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.188).

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay Password (p.121).

X
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby”
(p.153) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name”
(p.154) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from
iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.131) in the “Input” menu to “Off”.

Caution
When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could
result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop
playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately.

110

■ Playback screen
SOURCE

a
b

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

a Playback indicator

SCENE

b Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time.

PROGRAM

MUTE

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

VOLUME

c Operation menu
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

Menu
Screen Off

Function
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

X
You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

111

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the

■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms

unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).

You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can
listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room

Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers

(Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).
Video (HDMI)

• Audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in each
zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.190).

Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

Multi-zone configuration examples
Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we

Guest room
(Zone2)

recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center
about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements.
Living room (main zone)

■ Enjoying music in other rooms

Connections
TV: p.114

You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.39
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.113

Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

Study room
(Zone2 and/or Zone3)

Video/audio (HDMI)

Living room (main zone)
Kitchen
(Zone2 or Zone4)

Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.39
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.113
Living room (main zone)
Connection
TV: p.114

112

Preparing the multi zone system

Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and

Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.

connect speakers to the external amplifier.

Caution

The unit (rear)

• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT

ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks

(HDCP2.2)

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

• Ensure that the bare wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with
the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short
circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 1

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AV 2

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

SUR. BACK

(R
SUB

R
2 OPTICAL

■ Connecting speakers to play back audio

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

SURROUND

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2 /
F.PRESENSE
DIO 4

Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2 or Zone3. The connection method varies

ZONE 3 /
R.PRESENSE

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)

depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).

Using the unit’s internal amplifier

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see

“Connecting Zone2/3 speakers” (p.39).

AUDIO

Zone2 or Zone3

Main zone

Y
(RX-A3070 only)
You cannot use an external amplifier for Zone2 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are set to output front
presence channel audio in “Power Amp Assign” (p.142) in the “Setup” menu. Also, you cannot use an external
amplifier for Zone3 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are configured to output rear presence channel audio.

X
You can adjust the volume for Zone2 and Zone3 output with the unit. When using an external amplifier with
volume control, set “Volume” (p.156) in the “Setup” menu to “Fixed”.

113

■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio

• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output from the
HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Zone2 - Audio Output” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2 or

• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.39).

Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multichannel playback in another room
(Zone4).

• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.

– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input

• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to the

– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source

unit with an HDMI cable (p.44).

– Changing the sound mode or audio settings

• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.
• On-screen menu operations are not available for Zone2 and Zone4.

HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack

The unit (rear)

(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input

HDMI OUT
2

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

(HDCP2.2)

AV 3

AV 1

HDMI

HDMI (HDCP

(ZONE
OUT)
AV 3

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 1

VIDEO

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

)

AV 2

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

CAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

AUDIO 4

SURROUND

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SURROU

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

Zone2 or Zone4
(Example: using an AV amplifier)
HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI

Main zone

Zone4

To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157)
in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.

114

■ Operating the unit from another room
(remote connection)

An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support

You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the supplied

remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting

remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT

the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver.

Remote connections between Yamaha products

jacks.

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

REMOTE

To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a remote control code for each

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE

OUT

device before using (p.168).

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT

( 3 NET

ARC

AV 2

DVD)

Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)

NETWO

(HDCP2.2)

2
(ZONE OUT)

Infrared signal
receiver

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 1

OUT

2
Y

AV 2

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

Remote control

AXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

FRONT

CENTER

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

5ȍ

SINGLE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

Infrared signal
transmitter

Infrared signal
receiver

External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Main zone

115

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
SOURCE

RECEIVER

RECEIVER z
AV

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

Input selection keys

1
2

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding

Press RECEIVER z.

pages.

Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled or
disabled.

MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

ZONE

indicator lights up in the front display.

SCENE

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Use the input selection keys to select an input source.

Y
• Audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you
connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected
for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to

• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.110)

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

• AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing
in the main zone.

X
• The Zone2/Zone3 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

• Listening to Internet radio (p.107)

• You can also use the web control (p.119) to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.99)

“SERVER”.

PRESET

only) (p.93)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.103)

• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each

RETURN

• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.97)

“Multi-zone output” (p.190).
ENTER

• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
only) (p.88)

3
PROGRAM

• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models) (p.84)

When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding zone

HDMI OUT

Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.

Use the ZONE switch to select a zone.

TUNER

ZONE

source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the

TV CH
CODE SET

Zone2/Zone3 input with the web control (p.119) or AV CONTROLLER (p.12).
• To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the
Zone2/Zone3 input or use the party mode (p.117).

Caution
To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.

116

SOURCE

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4

■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)

The following functions are also available when the zone you want to

The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same music that

operate is enabled.

is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo
playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function

AUDIO

Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)

when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house

Press VOLUME or MUTE.

party.

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)

VOLUME

TOP MENU

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front

To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold

display.

an input source can be registered for Zone4.)

POP-UP/MENU

MUTE

RETURN

DISPLAY

Setting the sleep timer

in the “Setup” menu.

Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,

off).

Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

ENHANCER
3

Press ENHANCER.

SLEEP

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

X
You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode Set” (p.157)

OPTION

ENTER

Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off.

SCENE

down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. (Only

ON
SCREEN

Press SCENE.

TV CH
CODE SET

117

Registering favorite items (shortcut)
SOURCE

You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth

RECEIVER

V-AUX

shortcut numbers.
1

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

TUNER

Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

Recalling a registered item

input source as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the

BLUETOOTH
USB
NET

• You can also use the “Favorites” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.109).
• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
contents cannot be registered.

ZONE

1
2

Registering an item
PROGRAM

MUTE

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

1
2

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.

Memory Preset
01:Empty

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.

Memory Preset
02:Empty

CODE SET

– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS, the unit
memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or
deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not recall the music file
correctly. In such cases, register the items again.

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.

• The registered content (songs and Internet radio stations) can be displayed as a list
and easily recalled by using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.74) on your mobile device.

“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered

– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the
network.
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.

INPUT

MUTE

• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.

– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.

To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use numeric

TV CH

– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to the
unit.

VOL.

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.

Shortcut number (flashes)

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Numeric keys
MEMORY

VOL.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

Press MEMORY.

DISPLAY

TV VOL

Recall Preset
01:USB

VOLUME

Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
TOP MENU

Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number (01 to 40).
You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a shortcut.

SCENE

Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.

118

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)

You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.

• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.162) in the “Information” menu.

Web browser

• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.121) to access the web
control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may
change each time the unit is turned on.

Web control

• If you have enabled the MAC Address Filter (p.153), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow the
PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its instruction

(wired or wireless)
PC

manual.

(wired or wireless)
Router

The unit

• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone,

iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.12).

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these cases,
configure the security software appropriately.
• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby mode,
set “Network Standby” (p.121) to “On”.
• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
– Internet Explorer 11.x
– Safari 9.x

1
2

Start the web browser.
Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)

119

Top menu screen

Control screen
c

f
b
c
d

a PLAY INFO

a CONTROL

Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.

Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.

b TOP MENU

b STATUS

Moves to the top menu screen.

Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.

c SCENE

c SETTINGS

Selects a scene for the selected zone.

Moves to the settings screen.

d POWER

d PARTY MODE

Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.

Turns on/off the party mode (p.117).

e VOLUME

e SYSTEM POWER

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the increments
used for volume adjustment.

Turns on/off the power for all zones.

f MAIN VOLUME

f RELOAD

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the increments used
for volume adjustment.

Reloads the current status of the unit.

g RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.

• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.
• Multi-zone volume adjustment on the web control may not work on the unit depending on the unit’s settings.

120

Settings screen

Google Analytics
Displays an explanation of data collection by Google Analytics. Data collection can be enabled or
disabled at any time.

b BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.

c RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

Note
• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.

• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network devices
correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and other
external devices.

a Rename

• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.154) or the name of each zone (p.155). Click
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).

Network

• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.

Selects the network connection method (p.152) or configures the network parameters (such as IP
address) (p.152). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

AirPlay Password
Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.110). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to
the unit.

MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.153) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to
apply the changes to the unit.

Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen
reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.

Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.153).

Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.

Firmware
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.

Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.

Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.

Licenses
Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.
En

121

Viewing the current status
SOURCE

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

You can view the current status (input or DSP program currently

AV 1-7

selected) on the front panel display or TV.

VIDEO AUX
AUDIO 1-4*1

Switching information on the front display

TUNER

ZONE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

Info
Audio Decoder

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

INFO

SLEEP

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

TUNER (DAB)
Bluetooth

information appears.

USB

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

SERVER
AirPlay

Information

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO
3

MEMORY
10

ENT

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*2)
* (U.K., Europe and Russia models)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station
(p.94).

About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding

AV1
†‡ Dsur

DISPLAY

MUSIC

TUNER (FM/AM)

Item name

POP-UP/MENU

MOVIE

Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*2)

(AM radio feature is not available on the Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models)

display items.

SCENE

Item

PHONO

AUDIO

MAIN 2 3 4

Currently input
source

See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.90) for details.
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*2)
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*2), IP Address (IP address),
Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi
MAC address)

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*2), IP Address (IP address),
Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi
MAC address)

MusicCast Link

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*2), IP Address (IP address), Ethernet MAC
(Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)

X
Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can

(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)

also be applied separately to each input source group.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

*1 AUDIO 4: RX-A3070 only
*2

The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no
audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

122

Viewing the status information on the TV
SOURCE

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.

AUDIO

Input source/
Party mode status

Compressed Music
Enhancer/Hi-Res
mode status

Volume/YPAO
Volume status

CINEMA DSP status

Sound mode

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Audio format/
Decoder

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

DISPLAY

To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

123

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is

Option menu items

available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings

during playback.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

Press OPTION.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Front display

Option
Tone Control

• Default settings are underlined.

Item

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1 SW
SR
SBL
SBR

TV screen

YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)

Dialogue
(Dialog)

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

3
4

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
Subwoofer/Bass
(Subwoofer/Bass)

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Enhancer
(Enhancer)

Video Processing
(Video Process.)

124

Page
125

YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume.

125

Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is
adjusted.

125

Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.

126

DTS Dialogue
Control
(DTS Dialog)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X
contents.

126

Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds.

126

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.

126

Lipsync Adjustment
(Lipsync Adj.)

To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Function
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and
low-frequency range individually.

Tone Control
(Tone Control)

Subwoofer Trim
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
(SW.Trim)

126

Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)

Enables/disables Extra Bass.

126

Enhancer
(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

127

Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio).

127

Video Mode
(V.M)

Enables/disables the video signal processing settings
configured in the “Setup” menu.

127

Video
Adjustment
(Video Adjust)

Selects a video adjustment setting from presets.

127

Item

Function

Input Trim
(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources.

128

Audio Select
(A.Sel)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one
audio connection is made for one input source.

128

Video Out
(V.Out)

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.

128

FM Mode
(FM Mode)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.

128

Init Scan
(Init Scan)

(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)

Input Settings
(Input Settings)

■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)

Page

Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.

YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency

Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.

sounds even at low volume.
Settings
88

Tune AID
(Tune AID)

(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the USB storage device
(p.102) or media server (p.106).

Repeat
(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the USB storage device
(p.102) or media server (p.106).

Checks reception strength of each DAB channel label.

levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural

Off (Off)

Disables YPAO Volume.

On (On)

Enables YPAO Volume.

X
• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already saved (p.54).
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at
night.

Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) individually.

the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low
volume at night.

Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Settings

Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments

Off (Off)

The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

On (On)

Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled.

• When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears.

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

volume.

X
Output level

repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

On
Off
Input level

125

Volume: high
Output level

Volume: low

You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE CONTROL

On
Off
Input level

■ Dialogue (Dialog)

■ Lipsync Adjustment (Lipsync Adj.)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can
turn up its volume by increasing this setting.

This setting is available only when “Delay Enable” (p.147) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Enable” (default).

Setting range
0 to 3

■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)

Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.

This setting is not available when DTS:X content is played back, or when the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder
is working.

Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

DTS Dialogue Control (DTS Dialog)

Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X contents.
Setting range
0 to 6

Extra Bass (Extra Bass)

Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass

This setting is available only when DTS:X content which supports the DTS Dialogue Control feature is played back.

sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the
subwoofer.

Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Settings

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from
below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.

X
This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are
used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.79) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

Ideal position

126

Off (Off)

Disables Extra Bass.

On (On)

Enables Extra Bass.

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)

■ Video Processing (Video Process.)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.

Configures the video signal processing settings.

Enhancer (Enhancer)

Video Mode (V.M)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.83).

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments)

settings configured in “Processing” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.83).

Direct (Direct)

Disables the video signal processing.

Settings

Processing
(Processing)

Enables the video signal processing.

Off (Off)

Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On)

Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)

Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)

Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment” (p.147)
in the “Setup” menu.

Others: Off (Off)

This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.

Settings
1 to 6

– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
– DSD audio

Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is
set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel
PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings
Enables the high-resolution mode.
On (On)

(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio signal
processing condition.)

Off (Off)

Disables the high-resolution mode.

127

■ Input Settings (Input Settings)

■ FM Mode (FM Mode)

Configures the input settings.

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.

Settings

This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences
when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Audio Select (A.Sel)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input
source.
Settings
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
Auto (Auto)

1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)

HDMI (HDMI)

Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input
through the HDMI jack.

Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt)

Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack.

Analog (Analog)

Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are
input through the AUDIO jacks.

Video Out (V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
Off (Off)

Does not output video.

AV 1-7 (AV1-7), VIDEO
AUX (V-AUX)

Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

128

Stereo (Stereo)

Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

Mono (Mono)

Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring input sources (Input menu)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).

The input source of the unit also changes.

X
You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

129

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Input menu items

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

X
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Default settings are underlined.

Item

Function

Page

Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon.

130

Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS.

131

Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.

131

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.

131

X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

(RX-A3070 only)
Balance Input Attenuator

Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode

Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input to
avoid sound distortion.
(RX-A3070 only)
Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.

To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

131

■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

X
Some network input sources (such as “AirPlay”) cannot be renamed or have the icons changed.

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Auto” or “Manual” and press the cursor key (w).
If you select “Auto”, the unit creates a name automatically according to the connected device. In
this case, skip Steps 3 and 4.

X
This step is available only when “AV1-7”, “VIDEO AUX” or “AUDIO1-3” (available only when any audio digital
input jack is assigned) is selected.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

131

130

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Decoder Mode

■ Balance Input Attenuator

Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.

(RX-A3070 only)

For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to

Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input (AUDIO 4) so that you can

“DTS”.

avoid sound distortion when high-level signals are input.

Input sources
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)

Activate the attenuator when connecting an audio device which outputs signals of 3 V (RMS) or
higher to the AUDIO 4 (XLR balanced input) jacks (p.46).

* AUDIO 4: RX-A3070 only

Input source
AUDIO 4

Settings
Auto

Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS

Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

Settings
Bypass

Does not activate the attenuator for the balance input.

ATT.(-6dB)

Activates the attenuator for the balance input to reduce the signal level (-6dB).

■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.

■ Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode

Input sources
AirPlay

(RX-A3070 only)
Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.

Settings
Off

Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Limited

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to -20
dB and mute).

Full

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB
and mute).

Input source
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned), (network
sources), Bluetooth, USB
Settings
Off

Enables the jitter elimination function.
Level 1, Level 2, Level 3

■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
Disable

Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable

Allows DMCs to control playback.

X
A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When
this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on
the same network.

Disables the jitter elimination function.

131

The higher level enhances the DAC accuracy, but may cause audio interruptions
on some playback devices depending on the audio clock conditions. In this case,
select lower level.

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)

5
6

You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.76) using the TV screen.

1
2

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Press ON SCREEN.

Scene menu items

Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

Item

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the
cursor key (q).

Function

Page

Save

Registers the current settings in the selected scene.

132

Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also
configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items to be
included as the scene assignments, or view the settings currently
assigned to the selected scene.

133

Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon.

134

Reset

Restores the default settings for the selected scene.

134

■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the selected
scene.

X
If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the
corresponding SCENE key (p.77).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

132

■ Load

Check or uncheck

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments.

Device Control
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via
HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Choices
Off

Disables the SCENE link playback function.

HDMI Control

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI
Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via
HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control.

Input

Input (p.75), Station*1, Listening*1, Music Content*2, Playback*2, Audio Select
(p.128)
*1 Only when “TUNER” is selected
*2

Only when “Bluetooth”, “USB” or “NET” is selected

Default
SCENE1-2: HDMI Control

HDMI Output

HDMI Output (p.75)

SCENE3-12: Off

Mode

DSP Program (p.78), Pure Direct Mode (p.148), Enhancer (p.83), Enhancer Hi-Res
Mode (p.127)

Sound

Tone Control (p.125), YPAO Volume (p.125), Adaptive DRC (p.125), Extra Bass
(p.126)

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.148), Dialogue Lift (p.126), Dialogue Level (p.126),
Subwoofer Trim (p.126)

To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.190).

Detail

Video

Video Mode (p.149), Video Adjustment (p.127)

Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently

Volume

Master Volume (p.75)

assigned to the selected scene.

Lipsync

Lipsync (p.147), Delay (p.147)

To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press

Speaker Setup

Setting Pattern (p.142), PEQ Select (p.146)

ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected

For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with low
volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 and include “Volume” in

Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected

the assignments for SCENE4.

X
The scene assignments can include radio stations, or the content on a selected USB storage device and a network
device.

133

■ Rename/Icon Select

Playing a radio station or content included as the scene assignments automatically when
pressing SCENE

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Setup procedure

Individual contents cannot be registered for “Bluetooth” and “AirPlay”. The content lastly played back on each
device will be recalled.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

2
3

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

In the “Detail” screen, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Input” and press the cursor key
(r).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to set “Listening” or “Playback” to “On”.
When “TUNER” is selected, “Listening” is available.
When “Bluetooth”, “USB” or “NET” is selected, “Playback” is available.

If “Input” is unchecked, press ENTER to check the box.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.76) for the selected scene.

134

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV
screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.

X
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

5
6
3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).

X
You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

135

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

DSP Program menu items

Item

Function

Settings
1.0 s to 5.0 s

Reverb Time

Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.

Reverb Delay

0 ms to 250 ms
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound generation. Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.

• Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.

Higher to enrich the reverberant
sound and lower to have clear
sound.

• Default settings are underlined.

■ Settings for sound programs
Item

Decode Type

Function

Selects a surround decoder to be used in
combination with the selected sound
program.

0% to 100%

Settings
Auto, bDsur*, Neural:X, Neo:6
Cinema, Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)

The following items are available when you select “9ch Stereo”.
Item

-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
DSP Level

Initial Delay

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the sound field effect level.

Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.

Surround Back Initial
Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.

Surround Back Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.

Surround Back Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.

Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower to
weaken it.

Level

Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to reduce
it.

Adjusts the entire volume.

Front / Rear Balance

Adjusts the front and rear volume
balance.

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the left and right volume
balance.

1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

Function

Settings
-5 to 0 to +5
-5 to 0 to +5
Higher to enhance the front side, and
lower to enhance the rear side.
-5 to 0 to +5
Higher to enhance the right side, and
lower to enhance the left side.

1 ms to 49 ms

0 to 5 to 10

Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

Height Balance

Adjust the height volume balance
using the presence speakers.

Higher to enhance the upside, and
lower to enhance the downside. (The
presence speakers do not produce
sounds when “Height Balance” is set
to “0”.)

0.1 to 2.0

Monaural Mix

Enables/disables monaural sound
Off, On
output.

Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower to
reduce it.

X
Available items in “9ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.

0 to 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to reduce
it.

136

■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to
“bDsur” or “Neo:6 Music”.
Decode Type

bDsur

Neo:6 Music

Item

Function

Settings

Center Spread

Selects whether to spread
the center channel signals
to left and right when
2-channel source is
played.

Select “On” to spread center channel
signals to left and right if you feel the
center sound is too strong when
2-channel source is played.

Center Image

Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of the
front sound field.

Off, On

0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).

137

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

1
2

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

5
6

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.

138

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Setup menu items
Menu

Item

Function

Setting Pattern

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

142

Setting Data Copy

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

142

Selects a speaker system.

142

Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

143

Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

143

Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.

143

Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.

144

Front Presence

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.

144

Rear Presence

Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.

144

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.

144

Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and subwoofers.

145

Power Amp Assign

Speaker

Page

Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO).

Auto Setup

Configuration
Manual Setup

Subwoofer 1
Subwoofer 2
Layout
Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.

145

Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

146

Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

146

Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output.

146

139

Item

Lipsync

Sound

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

147

Auto/Manual Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

147

Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.

147

Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.

147

Max Volume

Sets the limit value of the volumes.

148

Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.

148

Pure Direct Mode

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.

148

Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

148

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD3.

148

Virtual Presence Speaker

Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers.

148

Virtual Surround Back Speaker

Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.

148

Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter).

149

Object Decode Mode

Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos or DTS:X contents.

149

(RX-A3070 only)

HDMI

Network

Page

Delay Enable

DAC Digital Filter

Video

Function

Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments).

149

HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input).

151

Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

152

Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.

152

Network Connection

Selects the network connection method.

152

IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

152

Network Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.

153

MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

153

Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.

154

MusicCast Link Power Interlock

Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit) also turns on the power of
other devices of the network.

154

Bluetooth

Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions.

154

Disconnect

Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit.

Bluetooth Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby).

154

Transmitter

Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.

155

Device Search

Searches available Bluetooth devices (speakers/headphones) when the unit is used as a Bluetooth audio transmitter.

Audio Receive
Bluetooth
Audio Send

140

Item

Function

Page

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

155

Volume

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

156

Max Volume

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 limit value of the volume.

156

Initial Volume

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

156

Audio Delay

Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3.

156

Zone2 Set

Mono

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

156

Zone3 Set

Enhancer

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

156

Tone Control

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

156

Extra Bass

Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

157

Balance

Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

157

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

157

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

157

Main Zone Set

Multi Zone

Zone4 Set
HDMI OUT2 Assign

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

157

Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone.

157

Input Assignment

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.

158

Remote PROGRAM Key

Assigns the desired function to the PROGRAM keys of the remote control.

158

Display Set

Dimmer (Front Display)

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

158

Short Message

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.

158

Function
Wallpaper

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

159

Trigger Output1

Trigger Mode

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

159

Trigger Output2

Target Zone

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

159

Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

160

Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.

160

ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode).

161

Select an on-screen menu language.

161

ECO
Language

141

Speaker (Manual Setup)

■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

Configures the speaker settings manually.
Choices

X
Default settings are underlined.

Pattern1 ▶ 2

Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.

Pattern2 ▶ 1

Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.

■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers
(with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply
bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance your system.

■ Setting Pattern

Settings

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

Basic

When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the
selected pattern.
7.2 +1Zone

• Measurement results (Auto Setup)

Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 9-channel
plus rear presence speakers) (p.21).
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2
system in the main zone (p.32).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default: Zone2).

• Power Amp Assign
• Configuration

7.2.2 +1Zone

Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2.2
system in the main zone (p.32).

• Distance

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).

• Level

Select this option when you use Zone2 and Zone3 speakers in addition to the 7.2
system in the main zone (p.32).

7.2 +2Zone

• Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1, Pattern2

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 and EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone2 for EXTRA SP 1, Zone3 for EXTRA SP 2).
(RX-A3070 only)

7.2.4 [ext.RP]

X
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.

Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including rear presence channel
expansion using an external amplifier (p.33).
(RX-A3070 only)

• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your

7.2.4 [ext.Front]

listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you
can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.

Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including front channel
expansion using an external amplifier (p.34).
(RX-A3070 only)

7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP]

7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone

Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including front presence and
rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.34).
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2.2
system (including front channel expansion using an external amplifier) in the
main zone (p.35).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).

142

Center

Select this option when you use Zone2 and Zone3 speakers in addition to the 7.2
system (including front channel expansion using an external amplifier) in the
7.2 [ext.Front] +2Zone main zone (p.35).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 and EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone2 for EXTRA SP 1, Zone3 for EXTRA SP 2).
7.2 Bi-Amp

Select this option when you use the 7.2 system including bi-amp front speakers
(p.36).

5.2.2 Bi-Amp

Select this option when you use the 5.2.2 system including bi-amp front speakers
(p.36).

7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Large

Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components.
Select this option for small speakers.

Small

Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2
system (including bi-amp front speakers) in the main zone (p.37).

None

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

(RX-A3070 only)
7.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.FP+RP]

5.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.RP]

Surround

Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including bi-amp front speakers,
and front presence and rear presence channel expansion using an external
amplifier) (p.37).

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

(RX-A3070 only)

Settings

Select this option when you use the 5.2.4 system including bi-amp front speakers
and rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier) (p.38).

Select this option for large speakers.
Large

■ Configuration

Select this option for small speakers.

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

Small

X
None

larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”) as a guide.
• When the speaker size is set to “Small”, you can configure the “Crossover” setting after pressing ENTER.
Frequency sounds lower than the specified value will be output from the subwoofer and higher will be output
from the corresponding speakers.

Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components.
Select this option for small speakers.
Small

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than
the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).

X
“Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
En

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or

Large

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency
components.

143

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP
works when you select a sound program.

Surround Back

Rear Presence

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.

Settings

Large x1

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

None

Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
Large x2

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.

This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
Small x1

Small x2

None

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.

and its phase.

Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).

Settings

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.

Normal

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other
channels.

Reverse

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other
channels.

The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
Use

X
This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”.

Front Presence
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.

None

Settings

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels when both
“Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

None

Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.

144

Layout

Rear Presence
Selects a rear presence layout when rear presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates

Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and subwoofers.

the optimization of the sound field effect.
Surround

Settings

Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.
Settings
Rear

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the
room.

Front

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the
room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.81) works in this case.

Rear Height

Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed on the rear side wall.

Overhead

Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.

Dolby Enabled SP

Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the rear presence
speakers.

X
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround/Front Presence/Rear Presence)” is set to “None”.

• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26).

This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.

Subwoofer
Front Presence

Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.

Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates
Settings

the optimization of the sound field effect.
Settings

Left + Right

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right sides of the
room.

Front Height

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the front side
wall.

Front + Rear

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear sides of the
room.

Overhead

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.

Monaural x2

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.

Dolby Enabled SP

Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front presence
speakers.

X
This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.

X
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.

■ Distance

• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26).

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from
“Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

145

■ Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for
subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Settings
Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select

For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

an item.

YPAO:Flat

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front
speakers.

Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

YPAO:Natural

Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through

Does not use the equalizer.

Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the
cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 15.6 Hz to 16.0 kHz (15.6 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)

Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

“YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto

Setup” have already been saved (p.54). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

■ Test Tone

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.

Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings

X
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.54) to the “Manual” fields for fine
adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.

146

Off

Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or
equalizer.

Sound

Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set

Configures the audio output settings.

to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to
“Auto”.

■ Lipsync

Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.

Delay Enable

• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

fine adjustment.
• This setting is also available in “Lipsync Adjustment” (p.126) in the “Option” menu.

Choices
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-4*

■ Dynamic Range

* AUDIO 4: RX-A3070 only

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS

Settings
Disable

Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

signals) playback.

Enable

Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Settings

Auto/Manual Select

Maximum

Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard

Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes.
Minimum/Auto

Setting range

Auto

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that
supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio
output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Y
Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
En

147

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically
adjusted based on the input signal information.

■ Max Volume

■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.79). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP HD3

Sets the limit value of the volume.

functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo).

Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Settings

■ Initial Volume

Off

Disables CINEMA DSP HD3.

Enables CINEMA DSP HD3.

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings

■ Virtual Presence Speaker

Off

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.

Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround
speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front presence speakers are

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).

connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence speakers are connected but no rear

(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

presence speakers (p.79).
Settings

■ Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.83).

Off

Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

Settings

Auto
Video Off

Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected
input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is
selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed.

Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set “Virtual
Presence Speaker” to “Off”.

Does not output video signals including the wall paper.

■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.

■ Adaptive DSP Level

When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected.

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

Settings

Settings
Off

Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results
and the volume level.

Off

Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

X
VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.

148

Video

■ DAC Digital Filter
(RX-A3070 only)

Configures the video output settings.

Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have favorite
sounds.
Settings
Sharp Roll-off Type

Slow Roll-off Type

Short Latency Type

Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with steep attenuation characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce clear sounds.
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with gentle attenuation characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce soft sounds.
Reduces the audio delay caused by the DAC internal digital filter.
It has a tendency to produce responsive and rhythmical sounds.

■ Video Mode

■ Object Decode Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments).

Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos or DTS:X

Settings

contents.

Direct

Settings

Processing

Disable

Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be played in
normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio.

Enable

Enables playback of object-based audio signals.

Disables the video signal processing.
Enables the video signal processing.
Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.

X
When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce
video output delay.

X
If audio output is not available when Dolby Atmos or DTS:X signals are input, set “Object Decode Mode” to

Resolution

“Enable”.

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Settings
Through

Does not convert the resolution.

Auto

Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

X
If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.165) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV
normally.)

149

Aspect

Detail Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.

Setting range
0 to 50

Settings
Through

Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the
screen.

Edge Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.

Setting range
0 to 50

This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p
(4K) signals.

Brightness
Adjusts the video brightness.

Adjustment

Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can register
the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).

Contrast

The video adjustments work on the video signals with 1080p or lower resolution.

Adjusts the video contrast.

■ Setup procedure

Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.

Saturation
Adjusts the video saturation.
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

3
4

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

150

HDMI

ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.192) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Configures the HDMI settings.

Settings
Off

Disables ARC.

Enables ARC.

Y
You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the
unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use
the TV’s speakers.

Standby Sync

■ HDMI Control

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.190).

“HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings
Settings
Off

Disables HDMI Control.
Off

Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.

Y
To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.190) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.

TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set
to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is
switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AUDIO 1-3
Default
AUDIO 1

Y
When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an
external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

151

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is
receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Network

■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.

Configures the network settings.

X
• The “HDMI OUT1” setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) is set to “Main”.

HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT
2 jack.
Settings
Off

Disables the audio output from the TV.

■ Network Connection

Enables the audio output from the TV.

Selects the network connection method.

Settings

The HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.

Wired

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
commercially-available network cable (p.50).

Wireless (Wi-Fi)

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless
router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a
wireless network” (p.67).

Wireless Direct

Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.72).

■ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in
standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (AV
1-7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby
indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
Off

(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)

■ IP Address

Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the
power saving mode.

DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings

152

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For
details, see “Manual network settings”.

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such
as IP address).

■ Manual network settings

■ MAC Address Filter

1
2

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

Filter

IP Address

Specifies an IP address.

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Subnet Mask

Specifies a subnet mask.

Settings

Default Gateway

Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P)

Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S)

Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Off

Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1-10”, specify the MAC addresses
of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

AirPlay (p.110) and DMC (p.131) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.

value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

MAC Address 1-10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to
the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1-5” or “MAC Address 6-10” and press
ENTER.

■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.

Settings

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

Off
On

value.

Disables the network standby function.
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Enables the network standby function.

Auto

(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving
mode when the network cable is disconnected.)

With an advanced energy saving design, this product achieves a low power consumption of not
more than two watts when in Network Standby mode.

153

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Bluetooth

■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.

Configures the Bluetooth settings.
■ Setup procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.97).
Settings

X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Disables the Bluetooth function.

Enables the Bluetooth function.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

■ Audio Receive

To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

Off

Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio receiver.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Bluetooth Standby

■ MusicCast Link Power Interlock

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices

Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit)

(Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a

also turns on the power of other devices of the network.

connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.
Settings

Settings
Off
On

Off

Disables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
Enables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).

Disables the Bluetooth standby function.
Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

X
This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.153) is set to “Off”.

154

Multi Zone

■ Audio Send
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio transmitter.

Configures the multi zone settings.

Transmitter
Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
When this function is enabled, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using Bluetooth
speakers/headphones (p.98).
Settings
Off

Disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.

Enables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.

■ Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.

Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure

1
2

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

4
En

155

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set

Audio Delay

Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.

Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3 so that the audio is synchronized with the
video.

Volume

Setting range
0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the volume

Mono

adjustment for the corresponding zone.

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Settings
Fixed

Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Variable

Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Settings

X
This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.142).

Off

Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

Enhancer

Max Volume

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.83) for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 limit value of the volumes.

Settings

Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Off

Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

X
Tone Control

This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) for Zone2 or

Initial Volume

Zone3 output.

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

Settings

Settings
Off

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.

Auto

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

Adjusts the levels of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range
(Bass) automatically in synchronization with the main volume, with correction for
the auditory response of the human ear.

Manual

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass)
manually (-6.0 to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments).

Bypass

Does not adjust the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency
range (Bass).

X
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

156

■ HDMI OUT2 Assign

Extra Bass

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 or Zone3 output. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can
enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of speakers.

Settings
Main, Zone2, Zone4

Settings
Off

Disables Extra Bass.

Enables Extra Bass.

X
For details on audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.190).

Zone2 - Audio Output

Balance

Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” is set
Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

to “Zone2”.

Setting range
-20 to 0 to +20 (negative to the left and positive to the right)

Enables the audio output.

Off

Disables the audio output (video output only).

Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Party Mode Set

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set”

Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.117) for each zone.

(p.155).
Choice
Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4

■ Zone4 Set

Settings

Configures the Zone4 settings.

Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set”
(p.155).

157

Disable

Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by
pressing PARTY on the remote control.

Function

■ Remote PROGRAM Key
Assigns the desired function to the PROGRAM keys of the remote control.

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

For example, when “INPUT Selection” is selected, the PROGRAM keys will operate as the input
switching keys.
Settings

■ Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
■ Procedure
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (2) jack to the input source “AV 2”

DSP Program
Selection

Select a sound program.

INPUT Selection

Select an input source for playback.

NET Selection

Select a network source.

Preset Selection

Select a registered item (shortcut).

Browse Screen 1 Page Up/Down

Move to the previous/next page of the browse screen list.

Subwoofer Trim

Adjust the subwoofer volume.

Dialogue Level

Adjust the volume of dialogue sounds.

qRepeat / wShuffle

Select the repeat/shuffle setting for the USB storage device or media server.

Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”, and press ENTER.

■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)

Use the cursor keys to select “2” and press ENTER.

The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.161) is set to “On”.

Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

X
You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
En

158

Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off

Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

Wallpaper

Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device
Settings

connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

Piano

Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal.

Choices

■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input

Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High

Transmits the electronic signal.

Target Zone

switching.

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Trigger Mode

Settings

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Main

Settings
Power

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.

Zone2

An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.”
Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission
with “Manual”.

Zone3

Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when
Zone4

“Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-4*, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3070 only

All

Settings
Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.

High

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in
this option.

159

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of any zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in any zone.

ECO

■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Configures the power supply settings.
Settings
Off

Does not protect the settings.

Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

X
When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

Icon

■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no
input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby
mode.
Settings
Off

Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

20 Minutes

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and no input
signals are detected for 20 minutes.

2 Hours, 4 Hours,
8 Hours, 12 Hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the
specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit will switch to
standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

Default
U.K., Europe and Russia models: 20 Minutes
Other models: Off

X
Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front
display.

160

Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)

■ ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting “ECO Mode” to “On”. After setting, be
sure to press ENTER to restart the unit.

You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.

Settings

Off

If new firmware is available,

Disables the eco mode.

(mail icon) appears at the upper right of the “Information”. For details, see

“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.171).

Enables the eco mode.

Y
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.

Language
Select an on-screen menu language.

Settings
English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian, Chinese

X
The information on the front display is provided in English only.

161

Types of information

■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.

You can check the following information in the Information menu.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.

■ Audio Signal

Interface

TV interface

Displays information about the current audio signal.

Video Resolution

Resolutions supported by the TV

Format

Channel
Input

Output

Audio format of the input signal

■ Network

The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)

Displays the network information on the unit.

For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels,
2 surround channels, and LFE).

Sampling

The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Dialogue

The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Channel

The number of signal output channels (for example, “5.1.2”
denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker
channels”) and the speaker terminals from which signals are
output

(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
IP Address

Subnet Mask

Subnet mask

Default Gateway

The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P)

The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S)

The IP address of the secondary DNS server

MAC Address (Ethernet)
MAC address

• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the

MAC Address (Wi-Fi)

specifications and settings of the playback device.
• Some information may not be available depending on the signal type.

■ Video Signal

Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

Analog Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog)

Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.154)

MusicCast Network

The status of the MusicCast network connection

SSID

Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution

Network Name

Wired/Wireless

Displays information about the current video signal.
HDMI Signal

IP address

162

The status of the wired or wireless connection
(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network

Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

(When using Wireless Direct)
SSID

The SSID of the wireless network

Security

Security method

Security Key

Security key

IP Address

IP address

Subnet Mask

Subnet mask

MAC Address (Wi-Fi)

MAC address

MusicCast Network

The status of the MusicCast network connection

Network Connection

“Wireless Direct” indication

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

1
2

Set the unit to standby mode.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z

STRAIGHT

■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
Remote ID

The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.165)

TV Format

The unit’s video signal type (p.165)

Speaker Impedance

The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.164)

Tuner Freq. Step

PROGRAM

3
4
5

(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.165)

System ID

System ID number

Firmware Version

The version of firmware installed on the unit

(mail icon) appears at the upper right of the

“Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can
update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s
firmware via the network” (p.171).

■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
Input

The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Volume

The volume for Zone2 or Zone3

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.

The new settings take effect.

X
If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network,

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

163

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Changing the speaker impedance setting
(SPEAKER IMP.)

X
Default settings are underlined.

SPEAKER IMP.
8¬MIN

Item

Function

SPEAKER IMP.

Changes the speaker impedance setting.

164

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers

REMOTE SENSOR

Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.

164

connected.

REMOTE ID

Selects the unit’s remote control ID.

165

TUNER FRQ STEP

(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

Page

Settings

165

TV FORMAT

Switches the video signal type.

165

MONITOR CHECK

Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.

165

4K MODE

Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format.

166

DTS MODE

Switches the DTS format notification setting.

166

RECOV./BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from
the backup.

166

INITIALIZE

Restores the default settings.

167

FIRM. UPDATE

Updates the firmware.

167

VERSION

Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

167

6 Ω MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

8 Ω MIN

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit.

Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
REMOTE SENSER
ON
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is
turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings

164

Turns on the remote control sensor.

OFF

Turns off the remote control sensor.

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
REMOTE ID

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
TV FORMAT
NTSC

ID1

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1).

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.

When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique
remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings
NTSC, PAL

Settings
ID1, ID2

Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Brazil and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 together for 3 seconds.

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)

To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 together for 3 seconds.

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)

MONITOR CHECK
YES
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

(Brazil, Asia and General models only)

Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.149)

TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9

when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different
resolution than the detected resolution.

Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region.

Settings

Settings
FM100/AM10
FM50/AM9

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by
10-kHz steps.
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by
9-kHz steps.

YES

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution
supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified
resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

Y
Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after
“MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.

165

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)

Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS
MODE)

4K MODE
MODE 1

DTS MODE
MODE 1

Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K compatible TV and
playback device are connected to the unit.

Switches the DTS format notification setting.

Settings

This setting informs the video device (such as BD/DVD player) about the DTS formats that the
Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.

unit supports.

MODE 1

Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed
correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.

Settings

MODE 2

Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.

This mode conforms to the DTS:X standard.

MODE 1

Use this setting under normal circumstances.

Format

Use this setting if the video device (such as BD/DVD player) fails to properly
output a DTS signal even when it is playing back DTS-HD or DTS:X content.

MODE 2
MODE 1
8 bit

12 bit

8 bit

10 bit

RGB 4:4:4

YCbCr 4:4:4

4K/60, 50 Hz

4K/30, 25, 24 Hz

10 bit

MODE 2
12 bit

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)

YCbCr 4:2:2

YCbCr 4:2:0

RGB 4:4:4

YCbCr 4:4:4

YCbCr 4:2:2

RECOV./BACKUP
BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
■ Backup/recovery procedure

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO to start the
process.

• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with

Choices

Ethernet.
• Regardless of the setting, 4K signals are input as “MODE 2” for the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.

BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.

RECOVERY

Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).

Note
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).

166

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

INITIALIZE
CANCEL

VERSION

x.xx

Restores the default settings for the unit.

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

Choices

VIDEO

Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL

Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL

Does not perform an initialization.

• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.163) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE)
FIRM. UPDATE
USB
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as
needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information
supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the
information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware
update.
Choices
USB

Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK

Update the firmware via the network.

X
If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.171).

167

Controlling external devices with the remote control
SOURCE
SOURCE

RECEIVER

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices (such
as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control code of the

V-AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise,

• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other ID
PARTY

HDMI OUT

is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.

ZONE
SCENE

• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the

registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register the
codes again.
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

OPTION

devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This function may not work

RETURN

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote control

twice.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

■ TV operations

DISPLAY

Registering the remote control code for a
TV

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you can
control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input source
selected on the unit.

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have

INPUT
TV VOL

Press TV z.

depending on the specification of the external device.)

ENTER

MUTE

3
4

Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE blinks

Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all the
input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI Control-compatible

ON
SCREEN

the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2.

code.

POP-UP/MENU

Press CODE SET.

external device.

• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

TV CH
CODE SET

Numeric keys

TV operation keys
TV z

CODE SET

INPUT

registered its remote control code.

TV operation keys

Switches the video inputs of the TV.

MUTE

Mutes the audio output of the TV.

TV VOL

Adjust the volume of the TV.

You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection keys
(p.169). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to operate the TV

TV CH

Switch the channels of the TV.

(this function may not be available on some TV models).

TV z

Turns on/off the TV.

See “List of remote control codes” (p.198) to find your
TV’s remote control code.

X
If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.
If that does not work, try the other codes.

168

Registering the remote control codes for
playback devices
SOURCE

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

SOURCE z
SOURCE
RECEIVER

V-AUX

AUDIO

Input selection keys

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if you

input source or scene.

have registered their remote control codes. You can also use the input

selection keys to change the playback devices that are controlled by the
remote control, because their remote control codes are assigned to the
input selection keys.

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

PARTY

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and numeric keys. You
device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For example, if you register the

See “List of remote control codes” (p.198) to find the
remote control code for your playback device.

VOLUME

By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or external
can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in orange), and an external

HDMI OUT

ZONE

Once you have registered the remote control code for your playback
device, you can control it using the following keys after selecting the

RECEIVER

■ Playback device operations

remote control code of your external device on TUNER, you can operate the unit’s
built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER and the external device after pressing
SOURCE.

SOURCE z

Turns on/off the playback device.

If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

that does not work, try the other codes.

External device
operation keys

Menu operation keys

ENTER

Cursor keys

Menu operation
keys

Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND
MODE

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

TV operation keys

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

Switches information on the display.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU

Displays the pop-up menu.

Stops playback.

Stops playback temporarily.

Starts playback of the selected
song/video.

Press the input selection key.
External device
operation keys

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote control

code.

CODE SET

Returns to the previous screen.

the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2.

playback device connected to the AV 1 jack.

Confirms a selected item.

RETURN

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise,

For example, press AV 1 to set the remote control code for the
Numeric keys

ENTER

DISPLAY

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

Select an item.

Displays the top menu.

Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).

Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks

twice.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

Skips forward/backward.

Numeric keys

Enter numerical values.

TV operation keys

Control the TV (p.168).

For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to

“Registering a scene” (p.77).

These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback device
and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.

169

Resetting remote control codes
SOURCE

You can reset a remote control code registered to each input selection

RECEIVER

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

SOURCE
RECEIVER

AUDIO

Input selection keys

key.

Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise,

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1.

ZONE
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

2
3

VOLUME

Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.

Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Press the input selection key.

If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.

OPTION

ENTER

To reset the remote control to factory default settings
RETURN

a Press CODE SET.
b Press RECEIVER.
c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Numeric keys

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH
CODE SET

CODE SET

170

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
SOURCE

New firmware that provides additional features or product

RECEIVER

V-AUX

Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it.
AUDIO

Note
PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable
during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

ZONE

• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.167).

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

Updating the unit’s firmware immediately

improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the

1
2

To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select
“START” and press ENTER.

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on
the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel.

• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.

VOLUME

Read the on-screen description.

The firmware update is complete.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED

If you want to cancel without doing anything now, select “CLOSE”.

SETUP” menu (p.167).
• The firmware update indicator (p.15) on the front display lights up when a firmware

be displayed in the “System” screen (p.163). You can update the unit’s firmware by
pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.

update is available via the network.

BAND

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

Information icon

ON SCREEN is pressed.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

(mail icon)

appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will

TV CH
CODE SET

Message

System Icon
En

171

Updating the unit’s firmware at power off
SOURCE

RECEIVER

z
AV

V-AUX

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

ZONE

To set the firmware to update at power off, use the cursor

Press z (receiver power) to turn off the unit.
The following message is displayed on the front display.

SCENE

Read the on-screen description.

keys to select “LATER” and press ENTER.

TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4

1
2

Firmware update indicator (flashes)
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

NETWORK
UPDATE:ENTER

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

The unit turns off automatically without performing the firmware update 2
ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

MEMORY
10

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

minutes after Step 3.

To start the firmware update, press ENTER.

X
• To cancel the firmware update and turn off the unit, press RETURN.
• You can also start the firmware update by pressing INFO on the front panel.
• The unit turns off without performing the firmware update if you turn off the
unit with AV CONTROLLER or MusicCast CONTROLLER.

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

If the firmware update is complete, the unit turns off automatically.

TV CH
CODE SET

172

APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on

The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...

how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction
manuals for each device.

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...

speaker settings again (p.54). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual
Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.142).

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...

input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are
watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.158) in the “Setup” menu to turn off

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the

the short messages.

volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the
unit in advance (p.148). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.156).

You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing
“Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.160).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied.
If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha

applied when the receiver is turned on (p.148). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 or

product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different

Zone3 (p.156).

remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.165).

We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...

You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio

“Option” menu (p.128).

played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this
function, set “Standby Through” (p.152) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...

switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled.

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.190). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable
HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required

173

Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.

First, check the following:

1
2
3

The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely.
The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest
When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks
Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
if you try to turn on the power.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit.
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it
supply voltage.
again.)

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately.

The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.29).

The sleep timer worked.

Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used for
the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to
“Off” (p.160).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.164).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.29).

The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the
unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.161).

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall
supply voltage.
outlet and plug it again.)

174

Problem

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.

Cause

Remedy

The unit is out of the operating range.

Use the remote control within the operating range (p.6).

The batteries are weak.

Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong
lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.165).

The remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.164).

The remote control is set to control the unit.

Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights up in
green).

The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.

Set the remote control code again (p.168). Even if the remote control code is registered
properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.

External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.

175

Audio
Problem

No sound.

Cause

Remedy

Another input source is selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format
of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.162).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The maximum volume is set.

Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.148).

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.

Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.162).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.146).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.54) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the
speaker settings (p.143).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.54) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker
volume (p.146).

The volume cannot be increased.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals.

To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.146).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.54) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup” menu
to “Use” (p.144).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low.

Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.

Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
No sound from the playback device (connected to the Protection).
unit with HDMI).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the
limit.
No sound from the playback device (when HDMI
Control is used).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the playback device audio is output
from the speakers connected to the unit.

TV audio is selected as the input source.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

176

Problem

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used).

Cause

Remedy

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an
HDMI cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.41).

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
(If you are trying to use ARC)

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.151).

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.151). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the unit
with HDMI).

The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is disabled.

Set “Zone2 - Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.157).

Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.162). If necessary, change
the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.

Move the unit further away from the device.

Noise/hum is heard.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.161).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.

Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

The sound is distorted.

The sound is interrupted.

If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4, HDMI
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to
(p.114).
internal circuitry switching.

177

Video
Problem

Cause

Remedy

Another input source is selected on the unit.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.

Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.165).

No video.

No video from the playback device (connected to the
unit with HDMI).

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal”
in the “Information” menu (p.162). For information about video signals supported by the
unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.192).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the VIDEO
AUX (HDMI IN) jack.

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both the TV
and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.
To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the playback
device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.44).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)

Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using
(p.75).

Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
The video is interrupted.

(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4)

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due (p.114).
to internal circuitry switching.

178

FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
Problem

Cause

Remedy

There is multi-path interference.

Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception
(p.128).

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM
other electrical equipment.
antenna.
Select the station manually (p.85).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Select the station manually (p.85).

The AM radio signal is weak.

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the
supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations. Register AM radio stations manually
(p.85).

Auto Preset has been used.

DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Problem
No DAB radio reception.

Cause

Remedy

An initial scan has not been performed.

Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.88).

Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.

Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.91), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

There is no DAB coverage in your area.

Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of
the DAB coverage in your area.

There is multi-path interference.

Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.91), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter.

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.

No DAB radio reception even after performing an
initial scan.

DAB radio reception is weak or noisy.

DAB information is not available or is inaccurate.

The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
not provide information.

No DAB radio sound.

The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service.

179

Try the station later or select another station.

Bluetooth
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled.

A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.

No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted
during playback.

Enable the Bluetooth function (p.154).

Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.

Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.97).

The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.

Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP.

Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.

The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not
working for some reason.

Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.97).

The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low.

Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.

The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit.

Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.

The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.

Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.97).

The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.

Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

180

USB and network
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.

Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The unit does not detect the USB device.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.

Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.

Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to
“On” on the unit (p.152). If you want to configure the network parameters manually,
check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your
network (p.152).

The wireless router (access point) is turned off.

Turn on the wireless router.

The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart.
router (access point).
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access
point).
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might
disturb the wireless communication.

Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no
obstacles between them.
Turn off these devices.

Wireless network is not found.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
router (access point).
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are
shared (p.103).

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
unit to your PC.
The unit does not detect the PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
the PC to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the
MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.153).

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information
about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media
servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.103).

The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.

181

Problem

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.

Cause

Remedy

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been
stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the
station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played
only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number
varies depending on the radio station.

The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.

Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router.
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
smartphone/tablet to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the
MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.153).

The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.

Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.

The MusicCast compatible device is not connected to the MusicCast
network.

Connect the device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.

No sound from the MusicCast compatible device.

The MusicCast connection cannot be made on
“MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

“MusicCast CONTROLLER” does not detect a
MusicCast compatible device.

The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.

Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and start “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.

Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.

The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.

Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and set the MusicCast compatible
device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

Disable the cellular data transmission.

Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Enable the network standby function on the MusicCast compatible device.

Firmware update via the network is failed.

It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.

182

Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.167).

Error indications on the front display
Message
Access denied

Cause

Remedy

Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.103).

The unit cannot access the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Access error
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.50).
Check SP Wires

The speaker cables short circuit.

Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Internal Error

An internal error has occurred.

Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

No content

There are no playable files in the selected folder.

Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

No device

The unit cannot detect the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Please wait

The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on
again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.165).

Remote Off

The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote
control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP”
menu to “ON” (p.164).

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some
reasons.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats
supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.103). If the unit supports
the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic.

Firmware update is failed.

Update the firmware again.

USB Overloaded

An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error

Firmware update is failed.

Update the firmware again.

Unable to play

Update failed.

183

Glossary
This section explains the technical terms used in this manual.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio
CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest

Audio information (audio decoding format)

frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better
audio quality than that used for CDs.

Dolby Atmos

DTS 96/24

Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format

Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as

remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This

independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3

technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of

DTS Dialog Control

sound above the listener.

DTS Dialog Control allows you to boost the dialog. This can be useful in noisy environments to help make the dialog

Dolby Atmos Stream

more intelligible. People with impaired hearing may also benefit. Note that the content creator may disable the use

Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby

of this feature in the mix, so that DTS Dialog Control may not always be available. Note that updates to your AVR may

TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata

add more functionality to DTS Dialog Control or increase the range of the feature.

that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV

DTS Digital Surround

receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio.

Dolby Digital

This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel

DTS-ES

audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds

Dolby Digital Plus

a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is

7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that

recorded.

support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Express

Dolby Enabled Speaker

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression

A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology employ the

rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming

ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled

services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that can be built into a conventional

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback.

7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing

Dolby Surround

multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray

Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for

discs).

playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as

DTS-HD Master Audio

well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater

technology.

experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of

Dolby TrueHD

96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition

BD (Blu-ray discs).

home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96
kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD
(Blu-ray discs).

184

DTS Neo:6

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic

music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix

technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing

channels of surround sound.

data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

DTS:X
DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS. Unbound from channels,
DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich, realistic and immersive soundscape - in
front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to
automatically adapt the audio to the speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to
a home surround theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at
www.dts.com/dtsx

FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in
compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression
method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10
maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on
Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3.

Neural:X
Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built in to DTS:X to
provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can
produce up to 11.x channels.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is
the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on
a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is
digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the
sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric
value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate.

WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting
audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression
methods.

185

Audio Information (Others)

HDMI and video information

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

Component video signal

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and

unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and

Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals

woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

is independent.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

Composite video signal

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and

added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel

transmitted with a single cable.

is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Deep Color

Lip sync

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase

within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using

in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video

8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to

output.

increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal
transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital
contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).

HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal
transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any
loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video
interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.

x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and
allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of
sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images.

186

Network information

Yamaha technologies

SSID

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.

Since the surround sound systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced

Wi-Fi

in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall
material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you

Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet

hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the

wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with

audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home.

network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can
carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.

CINEMA DSP HD3

WPS

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP HD3
feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a

intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.

wireless home network.

Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such
as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system.

SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones
have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed
on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left
and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.

Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front
surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without presence
speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room.

Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed
of CINEMA DSP.

187

Supported devices and file formats

File formats
For information about specifications of each file, refer to the instruction manual of your

This section explains the devices and file formats supported by the unit.

recording device or consult file’s help.

Supported devices

■ USB/PC (NAS)

For information about specifications of each device, refer to the instruction manual of it.

File

■ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.

WAV *

• A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible,
depending on the model.

■ USB devices
• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio
players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.

• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192

Quantization
bitrate (bit)

Bitrate

The number
of channels

Gapless
playback

16/24

MP3

32/44.1/48

8 to 320

WMA

32/44.1/48

8 to 320

MPEG-4 AAC

32/44.1/48

8 to 320

FLAC

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192

16/24

ALAC

32/44.1/48/88.2/96

16/24

AIFF

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192

16/24

DSD

2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz

• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or
USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.

Sampling frequency
(kHz)

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB
* Linear PCM format only

storage device.

Y
• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC

■ AirPlay

files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.

AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

Lion or later, and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
Made for.
iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 7, iPhone SE, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone
5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s
iPad Pro (9.7″ and 12.9″), iPad mini 4, iPad Air 2, iPad mini 3, iPad Air, iPad mini 2, iPad mini,
iPad (3rd and 4th generation), iPad 2
iPod touch (5th and 6th generation)
(as of May 2017)

188

Video signal flow

Video conversion table

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output

to a TV as shown below.

• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

Video device

The unit

HDMI out
480i/576i

480p/576p

720p

1080i

1080p

720p

1080i

1080p/50, 60 Hz

Resolution
480i/576i
480p/576p

HDMI in

HDMI out

HDMI

HDMI in

1080p/24 Hz

4K
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO

720p

1080i

480i/576i

COMPONENT
VIDEO

480p/576p
COMPONENT VIDEO in

VIDEO in
VIDEO

VIDEO

480i/576i

VIDEO in

m: Available

189

Multi-zone output

Information on HDMI

Audio signals that can be output to Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4 vary depending on how you

This section explains the functions related to HDMI and its signal compatibility.

connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks.
Using the unit’s internal
amplifier (p.39)
EXTRA SP 1-2 jacks

ZONE OUT jacks

In \ Out
Zone2

Zone3

HDMI Control

Using an external amplifier (p.113)

Zone2

Zone3

m (*3)

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that

HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack

supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power

Zone2 (*1)

Zone4 (*2)

m (*4)

m (*5)

Digital audio (HDMI)

m (*3)

Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)

m (*6)

Analog audio (AUDIO)

USB (*7)

Network sources (*7)

TUNER

and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such
as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV and playback devices” (p.41) and
“Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.44).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner

m: Available

• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Zone2 -

• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

Audio Output: On)

(Example)

*2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]

HDMI Control

when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
Playback device
also turns off

*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]

The unit turns off
(standby)

when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)

Turn off the TV

*5 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source
selected in the main zone is selected)

Operations available from the unit’s remote control

*6 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input

• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.76)

*7 To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2/Zone3 input

• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)

with the web control (p.119) or use the party mode (p.117).

• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering remote
control codes (p.169)

190

(Example)
HDMI Control

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

5
6

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

Press ON SCREEN.

HDMI Control

Playback starts

Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
Press SCENE 1

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

Y
This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

1
2

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

Press ON SCREEN.
ON
SCREEN

RETURN

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback
devices.

5
6

OPTION

ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

Configure the settings of the unit.

Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

DISPLAY

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select
the input source manually.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

7
8

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV
or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

191

HDMI signal compatibility

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4.
It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be

limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.

output, depending on the type of the DVD player.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to

the TV.

the instruction manual for each device.

• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more

• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so

effectively.

that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream

• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.

signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback
device.

Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal
to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.

1
2

Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to
“AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
• “ARC” (p.151) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
• The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked
“ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for the TV.

Y
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.151) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an
audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.43).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

X
“AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO
1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.151) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.77), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE 2.

192

Trademarks
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)
Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos,
Dolby Surround, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.

All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi
Alliance®.
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license
from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol,
DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.

MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

The terms HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.

x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

Yamaha Eco-Label is a mark that certifies products of high environmental
performance.

Supports iOS 7 or later for setup using Wireless Accessory Configuration.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an
electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod,
iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to
meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may
affect wireless performance.

iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod touch, and Apple TV are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPad Air and iPad mini are trademarks of Apple Inc.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is
strictly prohibited.

Google Noto Fonts (Version 1.001)

Windows™

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries.

You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.

App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
limitations under the License.

Android™ Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is
under license.

Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.

Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).

193

Specifications
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

Input jacks

[RX-A2070]

• Analog Audio

– Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND
BACK L/R)

– VGA

– ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)

– 576i/50 Hz

[RX-A3070]
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, VIDEO AUX)
Audio (Balance) x 1 (AUDIO 4) (1:GHD, 2:HOT, 3:COLD)
[RX-A2070]
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, VIDEO AUX)
• Digital Audio
Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1-2, AUDIO 3)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 192 kHz)
• Video
Composite x 4 (AV 1-4)
Component x 2 (AV 1-2)
• HDMI Input

• HDMI Output

– 480i/60 Hz

– 480p/60 Hz

HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1-2 *5)

– 576p/50 Hz

*5 barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4)

– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

Other jacks

– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• YPAO MIC x 1

– 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• REMOTE IN x 1

• Supported Audio Formats

• REMOTE OUT x 1

– Dolby Atmos

• TRIGGER OUT x 2

– DTS:X

• RS-232C x 1

– Dolby TrueHD

HDMI

– Dolby Digital Plus

• HDMI Features

– Dolby Digital

– 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60,50Hz 10/12bit)

– DTS-HD Master Audio

– 3D Video

– DTS-HD High Resolution

USB x 1 (USB2.0)

– ARC (Audio Return Channel)

– DTS Express

NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

– HDMI Control (CEC)

– DTS

– Auto Lip Sync

– DSD 2.8 MHz 2-ch to 6-ch

HDMI x 8 (AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX)
• Others

Output jacks
• Analog Audio
– Speaker Out x 11 (9 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R *1, EXTRA SP 2 L/R *2)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible
[F.PRESENCE, ZONE2, ZONE3, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
*2 Note: Assignment is possible
[R.PRESENCE, ZONE2, ZONE3, F.PRESENCE]
– Subwoofer Out x 2

– 21:9 Aspect Ratio

– PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24 bit)

– Deep Color

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

– x.v.Color

(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible)

– BT.2020 Colorimetry

TUNER

– HDR (High Dynamic Range)

• Analog Tuner

– HD audio playback
– Selectable HDMI input in HDMI standby mode

[Australia model]
DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)

– HDMI Zone Output

[U.K., Europe and Russia models]

(SUBWOOFER 1-2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)

DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)

– Headphone x 1

[Other models]

[RX-A3070]

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

– Pre Out x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND
BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R *3, R.PRESENCE L/R *4)

USB

*3 Note: barter to ZONE2

• Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory

*4 Note: barter to ZONE3

• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A

194

Bluetooth
• Sink Function
Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
• Source Function
AVR to Sink Device (ex. Bluetooth Headphone)
• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
• Bluetooth Version........................................................... Ver. 2.1+EDR
• Supported Profile
Sink Function .................................................................A2DP, AVRCP
Source Function .............................................................A2DP, AVRCP

• Wi-Fi function

Audio Section

– Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
– Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection and
USB connection
– Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
– Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
– Radio Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz
– Wireless LAN Standards: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
– Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency): 2412 MHz to 2472 MHz
– Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P): 17.5 dBm (56.2 mW)

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
[RX-A3070]
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R......................................................................165 W+165 W
Center ......................................................................................165 W
Surround L/R ...............................................................165 W+165 W
Surround Back L/R ......................................................165 W+165 W
Front Presence L/R......................................................165 W+165 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)

Compatible Decoding Formats

Front L/R......................................................................150 W+150 W

Sink Function ....................................................................... SBC, AAC

• Decoding Format

Center ......................................................................................150 W

Source Function ............................................................................SBC

– Dolby Atmos

Surround L/R ...............................................................150 W+150 W

• Wireless Output ...................................................... Bluetooth Class 2

– Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

Surround Back L/R ......................................................150 W+150 W

• Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency)... 2402 MHz to 2480 MHz

– Dolby Digital

Front Presence L/R......................................................150 W+150 W

• Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P) .......................... 4.0 dBm (2.5 mW)

– DTS:X

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

• Maximum Communication Distance ................................10 m (33 ft)

– DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express

Front L/R......................................................................165 W+165 W

– DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

Surround L/R ...............................................................165 W+165 W

– DTS Digital Surround

Surround Back L/R ......................................................165 W+165 W

• Supported Codec

MusicCast
• Controlled by MusicCast Application (iOS, Android)
• MusicCast Link Client ..........................................Main, Zone2, Zone3
• MusicCast Link Master (Input Source) .................................................
NET/USB/Bluetooth, Analog External Input, Digital External Input,
Zone2
• Network Connectivity ....................................Extend Mode, Connect

• Post Decoding Format

Center ......................................................................................165 W

Front Presence L/R......................................................165 W+165 W

– Dolby Surround

[RX-A2070]

– Neural:X

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)

– DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Front L/R......................................................................150 W+150 W
Center ......................................................................................150 W

Network

Surround L/R ...............................................................150 W+150 W

• PC Client Function

Surround Back L/R ......................................................150 W+150 W

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

Front Presence L/R......................................................150 W+150 W

• AirPlay supported

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)

• Internet Radio

Front L/R......................................................................140 W+140 W
Center ......................................................................................140 W
Surround L/R ...............................................................140 W+140 W
Surround Back L/R ......................................................140 W+140 W
Front Presence L/R......................................................140 W+140 W

195

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ......................................................................155 W+155 W

• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)

Front Presence L/R............................................................ 220 W/ch

Center ......................................................................................155 W

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)

Surround L/R ...............................................................155 W+155 W

Front L/R ............................................................................230 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ......................................................155 W+155 W

Center.................................................................................230 W/ch

Front Presence L/R......................................................155 W+155 W

Surround L/R......................................................................230 W/ch

• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
[RX-A3070]

Surround Back L/R.............................................................230 W/ch
Front Presence L/R ............................................................230 W/ch

• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[RX-A3070]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω).........................................175/220/295/410 W
[RX-A2070]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω).........................................165/210/285/405 W
• Damping Factor

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)

Front L/R ............................................................................ 200 W/ch

Front L/R ............................................................................230 W/ch

Center ................................................................................ 200 W/ch

Center.................................................................................230 W/ch

Surround L/R ..................................................................... 200 W/ch

Surround L/R......................................................................230 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 200 W/ch

Surround Back L/R.............................................................230 W/ch

Front Presence L/R............................................................ 200 W/ch

Front Presence L/R ............................................................230 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

Surround L/R ..................................................................... 220 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 220 W/ch

[RX-A3070]

Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω.........................................................150 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω).............................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)....................................200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .......................................... 45 mV or more

[RX-A2070]

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .....................................2.4 V or more

Front L/R ............................................................................ 185 W/ch

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)

Center ................................................................................ 185 W/ch

Front L/R ............................................................................220 W/ch

Surround L/R ..................................................................... 185 W/ch

Center.................................................................................220 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 185 W/ch

Surround L/R......................................................................220 W/ch

Front Presence L/R............................................................ 185 W/ch

Surround Back L/R.............................................................220 W/ch

Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) .......................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)

Front Presence L/R ............................................................220 W/ch

ZONE OUT.......................................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω

Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 230 W/ch

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)

[RX-A2070]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)

• Rated Output Level / Output Impedance
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ...................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω

• Maximum Output Level

Front L/R ............................................................................220 W/ch

PRE OUT/ZONE OUT ......................................................2.0 V or more

Center.................................................................................220 W/ch

• Headphone Impedance ................................................. 16 Ω or more
• Frequency Response

Front L/R ............................................................................ 190 W/ch

AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) .............................................+0/-3 dB

Center ................................................................................ 190 W/ch

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

Surround L/R ..................................................................... 190 W/ch

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ...................................................... 0±0.5 dB

Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 190 W/ch

• Total Harmonic Distortion

Front Presence L/R............................................................ 190 W/ch

[RX-A3070]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ............................................................................ 175 W/ch

PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) ....................................0.04% or less

Center ................................................................................ 175 W/ch

AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 75 W/ 8 Ω)
.....................................................................................0.04% or less

Surround L/R ..................................................................... 175 W/ch

[RX-A2070]

Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 175 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 175 W/ch

PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) ....................................0.04% or less

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)

AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W/ 8 Ω)
.....................................................................................0.04% or less

Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 220 W/ch

196

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(Pure Direct, Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)
PHONO .......................................................................... 95 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc ................................................................. 110 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Speaker Out ...................................................................150 μV or less
• Channel Separation
(Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO ............................................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc ........................................................ 75 dB/60 dB or more
• Volume Control
Main Zone .............................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2/Zone3 ........................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut .................................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover........................................................................ 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ............................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover.................................................................... 3.5 kHz
Zone2/Zone3
Bass Boost/Cut .................................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover........................................................................ 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ............................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover.................................................................... 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
............................................................................................. 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .............................................................. 24 dB/oct.

Video Section
• Video Signal Type .................................................. NTSC/PAL/SECAM
• Video Signal Level
Composite......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y...................................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr ........................................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level.....................................1.5 Vp-p or more

• Standby Power Consumption

FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...........................87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Brazil, Asia and General models]
.................................................. 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models]..............87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono............................................................................. 3 μV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ....................................................................69 dB/68 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.5%/0.6%
• Antenna Input ..........................................................75 Ω unbalanced

AM section (except Australia, U.K., Europe
and Russia models)
• Tuning Range

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
......................................................................................................0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off...................................................................1.5 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired.........................................................................................1.8 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi).........................................................................1.8 W
Wireless Direct..........................................................................1.9 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off,
Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On...............1.7 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby On
(Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On ...................................2.7 W
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Brazil, Asia and General models]............................................1210 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
................................. 435 x 192 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions

[U.S.A. and Canada models]...............................530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Brazil, Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ....................................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz

DAB section (Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
• Tuning Range ......................................174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)

• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright)
................................. 435 x 247 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 18-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusion
• Weight
[RX-A3070]
[China, Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models]
............................................................................... 19.6 kg (43.2 lbs)

• Support Audio Format............... MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2

[Other models] ...................................................... 18.1 kg (39.9 lbs)

• Antenna ....................................................................75 Ω unbalanced

[RX-A2070] ................................................................ 17.0 kg (37.5 lbs)

General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models]....................................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Brazil and General models] .... AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model].............................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ............................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ........................................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ................................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption.................................................................. 490 W

197

* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the
publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha
website then download the manual file.

List of remote control codes
TV
A.R. Systems
Acme
Acura
ADC
Admiral

0320
0342
0323, 0343
0337
0054, 0178, 0336, 0337, 0339,
0346, 0347
Advent
0158
Adventura
0057
Adyson
0277, 0282, 0342
Agashi
0277, 0282
Agazi
0337
Aiko
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0342,
0343
Aim
0320
Aiwa
0078, 0379
Akai
0050, 0055, 0109, 0159, 0181,
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0349, 0350
Akiba
0320, 0340
Akura
0320, 0323, 0337, 0340
Alaron
0277
Alba
0161, 0277, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0351,
0372, 0382
Albatron
0140
Alcyon
0171
Alleron
0059
Allorgan
0282
Allstar
0320, 0350
America Action 0179
AMOi
0276
Amplivision
0161, 0282, 0321, 0342
Amstrad
0320, 0323, 0337, 0340, 0343
Amtron
0058
Anam
0179, 0343
Anam National 0052, 0058
Anglo
0323, 0343
Anitech
0171, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0343
Ansonic
0161, 0168, 0320, 0323, 0341,
0343
AOC
0008, 0026, 0050, 0053
Apex
0039, 0111, 0217
Arcam
0277, 0282
Arcam Delta
0342
Aristona
0320, 0349, 0350
Arthur Martin 0321
ASA
0339, 0347
Asberg
0171, 0320, 0350
Astra
0343

Asuka
Atlantic
Atori
Auchan
Audiosonic

0277, 0282, 0337, 0340, 0342
0277, 0320, 0342, 0349, 0350
0323, 0343
0321
0161, 0282, 0320, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0349, 0350
AudioTon
0161, 0282, 0342
Audiovox
0058, 0179, 0194
Ausind
0171
Autovox
0171, 0282, 0337, 0339, 0342
Aventura
0051
Awa
0277, 0282
Axion
0156
Baird
0282
Bang & Olufsen 0180, 0339
Basic Line
0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343,
0350
Bastide
0282, 0342
Baur
0320, 0349
Bazin
0282
Beko
0161, 0269, 0294, 0302, 0311,
0320, 0328, 0351
Belcor
0008
Bell & Howell 0019, 0054
Benq
0097, 0242, 0361
Beon
0320, 0349, 0350
Best
0161
Bestar
0161, 0320, 0350
BGH
0400
Binatone
0282, 0342
Blue Sky
0320, 0340
Blue Star
0348
Boots
0282, 0342
BPL
0320, 0348
Bradford
0058, 0179
Brandt
0322, 0345
Brillian
0182
Brinkmann
0320
Brionvega
0320, 0339, 0349, 0350
Britannia
0277, 0282, 0342
Brockwood
0008
Broksonic
0109, 0179
Bruns
0339
BTC
0340
Bush
0269, 0282, 0283, 0304, 0320,
0323, 0328, 0332, 0340, 0343,
0344, 0346, 0348, 0349, 0350,
0372, 0382, 0463, 0470, 0472
byd:sign
0093
Candle
0008, 0026, 0050, 0057
Capsonic
0337
En

Carena
Carnivale
Carrefour
Carver
Cascade
Casio
Cathay
CCE
Celebrity
Celera
Centurion
Century
CGE
Changhong
Chimei
Cimline
Citizen
City
Clarion
Clarivox
Clatronic

0320
0050
0344
0010
0320, 0323, 0343
0367
0320, 0349, 0350
0183, 0282
0055, 0107
0039
0320, 0349, 0350
0339
0161, 0171
0039
0273
0323, 0343
0007, 0008, 0026, 0050, 0058
0323, 0343
0179
0349
0161, 0171, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0350,
0351
CMS
0277
CMS Hightec 0282
Coby
0197
Colortyme
0008, 0026
Commercial Solutions
0021
Concerto
0008, 0026
Concorde
0323, 0343
Condor
0161, 0277, 0320, 0323, 0342,
0350, 0351
Contec
0179, 0277, 0323, 0342, 0343,
0344
0012, 0058
Contec/Cony
Continental Edison
0345
Cosmel
0323, 0343
Craig
0058, 0179
Crosley
0010, 0037, 0171, 0339
Crown
0058, 0161, 0171, 0179, 0320,
0323, 0343, 0349, 0350, 0351
CS Electronics 0277, 0340, 0342
CTC Clatronic 0341
CTX
0205
Curtis Mathes 0007, 0008, 0010, 0019, 0021,
0026, 0049, 0050, 0178
CXC
0058, 0179
Cybertron
0340
Cytron
0152

198

Daewoo

0007, 0008, 0026, 0037, 0053,
0167, 0266, 0275, 0277, 0282,
0315, 0320, 0323, 0331, 0335,
0342, 0343, 0350, 0381, 0465
Dainichi
0277, 0340
Dansai
0277, 0282, 0320, 0337, 0349,
0350
Dantax
0161, 0349
Dawa
0320
Daytron
0007, 0008, 0026, 0323, 0343
De Graaf
0346
Decca
0282, 0320, 0342, 0349, 0350
Dell
0145, 0245
Denver
0358, 0362
Desmet
0320, 0349, 0350
Diamant
0320
Diamond
0277
DiamondVision 0135, 0143
Dimensia
0049
Disney
0219
Dixi
0282, 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349,
0350
Dream Vision 0461, 0498
DTS
0323, 0343
Dual
0282, 0320, 0342
Dual-Tec
0342, 0343
Dumont
0008, 0030, 0062, 0282, 0339,
0341, 0342
Durabrand
0031, 0051, 0179, 0215
Dux
0349
Dwin
0178
Dynatron
0320, 0349, 0350
Dynex
0228, 0231
EIZO
0509
Elbe
0161, 0168, 0282, 0320
Elcit
0339
Electa
0348
ELECTRO TECH 0343
Electroband
0055, 0107
Electrograph
0176
Electrohome
0008, 0026, 0052, 0055
Element
0230
Elin
0277, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0349,
0350
Elite
0320, 0340, 0350
Elman
0341
Elta
0277, 0323, 0343
Emerson
0000, 0007, 0008, 0012, 0013,
0019, 0026, 0031, 0037, 0051,
0058, 0059, 0161, 0179, 0320,
0339

Emprex
Envision
Epson
Erres
ESA
ESC
Etron
Eurofeel
Euro-Feel
Euroline
Euroman
Euromann
Europhon
Expert
Exquisit
Fenner
Ferguson
Fidelity
Filsai
Finlandia
Finlux
FIRST LINE
Firstline
Fisher
Flint
Formenti
Formenti/Phoenix
Fortress
Fraba
Friac
Frontech
Fujitsu
Fujitsu General
Fujitsu Siemens
Funai
Futuretech
Galaxi
Galaxis
Gateway
GBC
GE
Geant Casino
GEC
Geloso
General Technic

0154
0008, 0026, 0050
0155, 0206, 0359
0320, 0349, 0350
0051
0282
0343
0282
0337
0349
0161, 0277, 0282
0320, 0337, 0342, 0350
0277, 0282, 0320, 0341, 0342,
0350
0321
0320
0323, 0343
0322, 0345, 0349
0277, 0320, 0342, 0346
0282
0346
0171, 0282, 0320, 0339, 0341,
0342, 0349, 0350
0342, 0343, 0350
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323
0019, 0161, 0282, 0339, 0342,
0344, 0351
0320, 0350
0171, 0277, 0336, 0339, 0342,
0349
0277
0336, 0339
0161, 0320
0161
0282, 0323, 0337, 0343, 0346,
0347
0059, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0282
0282
0504, 0505, 0507, 0510, 0511
0051, 0058, 0059, 0112, 0113,
0115, 0118, 0119, 0179, 0337,
0488, 0489
0058, 0179
0320, 0351
0161, 0320
0176, 0177, 0241
0323, 0343, 0344
0008, 0021, 0023, 0026, 0027,
0031, 0034, 0049, 0052, 0056,
0209
0321
0282, 0320, 0342, 0347, 0349,
0350
0323, 0343, 0346
0323, 0343

Hygashi
Hyper
Hypson

Genexxa
GFM
Giant
Gibralter
GoldHand
Goldline
GoldStar

0320, 0340, 0347, 0350
0128, 0227
0282
0008, 0030, 0050, 0062
0277
0320
0007, 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031,
0050, 0053, 0161, 0277, 0282,
0320, 0323, 0342, 0343, 0346,
0349, 0350
Goodmans
0246, 0272, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0350,
0462, 0473, 0477
Gorenje
0161, 0351
GPM
0340
GPX
0129
Gradiente
0240
Graetz
0347
Granada
0171, 0282, 0320, 0321, 0342,
0344, 0346, 0349, 0350
Grandin
0340, 0343, 0348, 0349
Gronic
0282
Grundig
0160, 0161, 0171, 0310, 0320
Grunpy
0058, 0059, 0179
Haier
0157, 0233
Halifax
0277, 0282, 0337, 0342
Hallmark
0008, 0026, 0031
Hampton
0277, 0282, 0342
Hanseatic
0161, 0168, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0350
Hantarex
0320, 0323, 0343
Hantor
0320
Harman/Kardon 0010
Harvard
0058, 0179
Harwood
0320, 0323
Havermy
0178
HCM
0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0342,
0343, 0348
Hema
0282, 0323
Hewlett Packard 0192
Higashi
0277
HiLine
0320
Hinari
0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, 0344,
0349, 0350
Hisawa
0321, 0340, 0348
Hisense
0247
Hitachi
0008, 0012, 0026, 0066, 0084,
0092, 0093, 0120, 0172, 0173,
0255, 0270, 0271, 0282, 0320,
0335, 0338, 0342, 0344, 0346,
0347, 0365, 0382, 0448, 0456,
0467, 0482, 0484, 0487
Hornyphon
0320, 0350
Hoshai
0340
Huanyu
0277, 0342
En

Hyundai
Iberia
ICE
ICeS
Ilo
IMA
Imperial
Indiana
Infinity
InFocus
Ingelen
Ingersol
Initial
Inno Hit
Innovation
Insignia
Inteq
Interactive
Interbuy
Interfunk
International
Intervision
Irradio
Isukai
ITC
ITS
ITT
ITV
Janeil
JBL
JC Penney
JCB
Jensen
JVC
Kaisui
Kamosonic
Kamp
Kapsch
Karcher
Kawasho
KEC

199

0277, 0282, 0342
0277, 0282, 0323, 0342, 0343
0282, 0320, 0321, 0337, 0342,
0348, 0349, 0350
0141
0320
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0340, 0342, 0343, 0350
0277
0148, 0153
0058
0161, 0171, 0320, 0347, 0350,
0351
0320, 0349, 0350
0010
0250, 0327, 0363, 0479, 0508
0347
0323, 0343
0153
0171, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0349, 0350
0337, 0343
0131, 0228, 0236, 0238
0030
0161
0323, 0343
0161, 0320, 0339, 0347, 0349,
0350
0277
0161, 0282, 0320, 0337, 0341,
0342
0171, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343,
0349, 0350
0320, 0340
0282, 0342
0277, 0320, 0340, 0348, 0350
0343, 0347
0320, 0343, 0349
0057
0010
0007, 0008, 0026, 0027, 0049,
0053, 0056
0055, 0107
0008, 0026
0012, 0014, 0015, 0056, 0064,
0065, 0067, 0169, 0174, 0297,
0314, 0344, 0350, 0375
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0348
0342
0277, 0342
0347
0161, 0320, 0342, 0343, 0349
0008, 0026, 0055, 0277
0179

Kendo
Kenwood
KIC
Kingsley
KLH
Kloss Novabeam
Kneissel
Kolster
Konka
Korpel
Korting
Kosmos
Koyoda
KTV
Kyoto
Lasat
Lenco
Lenoir
Leyco
LG

LG/GoldStar
Liesenk
Liesenkotter
Life
Lifetec
Lloyds
Loewe
Loewe Opta
Logik
Luma
Lumatron
Lux May
Luxman
Luxor
LXI
M Electronic
MAG
Magnadyne
Magnafon
Magnavox
Magnum
Majestic
Mandor

0161, 0320, 0341, 0346
0008, 0026, 0050
0282
0277, 0342
0039
0057, 0058
0161, 0168, 0320
0320, 0350
0340
0320, 0349, 0350
0161, 0339
0320
0343
0007, 0050, 0058, 0179, 0183,
0282, 0342
0277, 0282
0161
0323, 0343
0323, 0342, 0343
0320, 0337, 0349, 0350
0031, 0053, 0066, 0116, 0117,
0140, 0161, 0164, 0175, 0195,
0269, 0277, 0282, 0300, 0309,
0317, 0320, 0323, 0328, 0342,
0343, 0346, 0349, 0350, 0366,
0368, 0377, 0466, 0471, 0478
0164
0349
0320
0337, 0343
0320, 0323, 0337, 0343
0323
0161, 0168, 0265, 0320, 0330,
0352
0339, 0349, 0350
0054
0320, 0323, 0346, 0349
0282, 0320, 0346, 0349, 0350
0350
0008, 0026
0282, 0342, 0346
0010, 0019, 0021, 0026, 0027,
0031, 0049, 0111
0342, 0343, 0345, 0347, 0349,
0350
0096
0339, 0341, 0349
0171, 0277, 0341, 0342
0008, 0009, 0010, 0013, 0026,
0032, 0033, 0048, 0050, 0128,
0211, 0212, 0224, 0226, 0239
0337, 0343
0054
0337

Manesth

0282, 0320, 0337, 0342, 0349,
0350
Marantz
0008, 0010, 0026, 0050, 0204,
0320, 0349, 0350
Marelli
0339
Mark
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0349,
0350
Masuda
0282
Matsui
0282, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0343,
0344, 0346, 0349, 0350, 0455
Matsushita
0017
Maxent
0147, 0176
Mediator
0320, 0349, 0350
Medion
0320, 0337, 0343
Megapower
0140
Megatron
0026, 0031
MElectronic
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323
Melvox
0321
Memorex
0019, 0026, 0031, 0053, 0054,
0137, 0215, 0323, 0343
Memphis
0323, 0343
Mercury
0320, 0323
Metz
0339
MGA
0008, 0026, 0031, 0050, 0053
Micromaxx
0337, 0343
Microstar
0337, 0343
Midland
0007, 0021, 0023, 0027, 0030,
0056, 0062
Minerva
0171
Minoka
0320, 0350
Mintek
0153
Mitsubishi
0008, 0026, 0031, 0053, 0066,
0084, 0093, 0098, 0150, 0178,
0289, 0320, 0339, 0344, 0350,
0376
Mivar
0161, 0168, 0171, 0277, 0282,
0342
Monivision
0140
Montgomery Ward
0054
Motion
0171
Motorola
0052, 0178
MTC
0008, 0026, 0050, 0053, 0161,
0277
Multi System
0349
Multitech
0058, 0161, 0179, 0183, 0277,
0282, 0320, 0323, 0341, 0342,
0343, 0344, 0346, 0349
Murphy
0277, 0342
NAD
0026, 0031, 0111
Naonis
0346
NEC
0008, 0026, 0050, 0052, 0053,
0072, 0103, 0282, 0344
Neckermann
0161, 0282, 0320, 0339, 0342,
0346, 0349, 0350, 0351

NEI
Net-TV
Neufunk
New Tech
New World
NewTech
Nicamagic
Nikkai
Nikko
Nobliko
Nokia
Norcent
Nordic
Nordmende
Nordvision
Novatronic
Oceanic
Okano
Olevia
ONCEAS
Onwa
Opera
Oppo
Optimus
Optoma
Optonica
Orbit
Orion
Orline
Osaki
Oso
Otto Versand
Pael
Palladium
Palsonic
Panama
Panasonic

Panavision
Pathe Cinema
Pausa
Penney
Perdio
Perfekt
Philco
Philharmonic

0320, 0349, 0350
0176
0320, 0323
0343, 0350
0340
0282, 0320, 0323
0277, 0342
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0340, 0342, 0349, 0350
0026, 0031, 0050
0171, 0277, 0341, 0342
0347
0201
0282
0339, 0345, 0347, 0350
0349
0320
0321, 0347
0161, 0320, 0351
0102, 0199, 0200, 0207, 0222
0342
0058, 0179
0320
0130
0017, 0019
0144
0178
0320, 0350
0043, 0146, 0283, 0320, 0323,
0328, 0343, 0349, 0350
0320
0282, 0320, 0337, 0340, 0342
0340
0282, 0320, 0336, 0342, 0344,
0348, 0349, 0350
0277, 0342
0161, 0282, 0320, 0342, 0351
0282
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0342, 0343
0016, 0017, 0020, 0022, 0023,
0035, 0052, 0056, 0084, 0085,
0133, 0163, 0193, 0284, 0286,
0290, 0292, 0320, 0325, 0347,
0356, 0483, 0485, 0490
0320
0161, 0168, 0277, 0321, 0342
0323, 0343
0021, 0023, 0031, 0050, 0111
0277, 0320
0320
0008, 0009, 0010, 0012, 0026,
0050, 0052, 0053, 0161, 0171,
0320, 0339
0282, 0342
En

Philips

0008, 0009, 0010, 0011, 0012,
0032, 0048, 0049, 0052, 0122,
0128, 0134, 0186, 0187, 0213,
0221, 0224, 0226, 0239, 0256,
0257, 0259, 0261, 0263, 0267,
0280, 0281, 0287, 0296, 0299,
0301, 0303, 0305, 0313, 0319,
0320, 0324, 0333, 0339, 0342,
0349, 0350, 0353, 0357, 0360,
0380, 0383, 0452, 0459, 0460
Philips Magnavox 0011, 0032, 0033
Phoenix
0161, 0277, 0320, 0339, 0349,
0350
Phonola
0277, 0320, 0339, 0349, 0350
Pilot
0007, 0008, 0050
Pioneer
0008, 0026, 0094, 0095, 0161,
0320, 0345, 0347, 0349, 0350,
0458, 0480
Plantron
0320, 0323, 0337, 0350
Playsonic
0282
Polaroid
0039, 0142, 0202, 0234
Poppy
0323, 0343
Portland
0007, 0008, 0026, 0053
Prandoni-Prince 0171, 0346
Precision
0282, 0342
Prima
0157, 0243, 0323, 0343, 0347
Princeton
0140
Prism
0023, 0056
Profex
0323, 0343
Profi-Tronic
0320, 0350
Proline
0320, 0350
Proscan
0021, 0027, 0049
Prosonic
0161, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0342,
0349
Protech
0282, 0337, 0341, 0342, 0343,
0349, 0350
Proton
0008, 0012, 0026, 0031
Protron
0196
PROVIEW
0096, 0246
Provision
0320, 0349
Pulsar
0008, 0030, 0062
Pye
0256, 0320, 0349, 0350, 0378
Pymi
0323, 0343
Quandra Vision 0321
Quasar
0017, 0023, 0052, 0056
Quelle
0282, 0320, 0337, 0342, 0349,
0350
Questa
0344
Radialva
0320
RadioShack
0019, 0021, 0031, 0050, 0179,
0320
RadioShack/Realistic
0007, 0008, 0012, 0026, 0049,
0058
Radiola
0282, 0320, 0349, 0350

200

Radiomarelli
Radiotone
Rank
RCA

0320, 0339
0161, 0320, 0323, 0350
0344
0008, 0021, 0024, 0025, 0026,
0027, 0042, 0049, 0052, 0053,
0063, 0136, 0225
Realistic
0019, 0031, 0050, 0179
Recor
0320
Redstar
0320
Reflex
0320
Revox
0161, 0320, 0349, 0350
Rex
0337, 0346, 0347
RFT
0161, 0168, 0339
Rhapsody
0277
R-Line
0320, 0349, 0350
Roadstar
0323, 0337, 0340, 0343
Robotron
0339
Rowa
0277, 0282, 0400, 0403, 0494
Royal Lux
0161
RTF
0339
Runco
0030, 0050, 0062
Saba
0298, 0322, 0339, 0345, 0347
Saisho
0282, 0323, 0337, 0342, 0343
Salora
0346, 0347
Sambers
0171, 0341
Sampo
0007, 0008, 0026, 0050, 0176,
0400
Samsung
0004, 0005, 0006, 0007, 0008,
0012, 0026, 0031, 0036, 0050,
0053, 0076, 0077, 0079, 0114,
0124, 0125, 0126, 0127, 0139,
0161, 0183, 0185, 0190, 0191,
0258, 0264, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0334, 0337, 0342, 0343,
0349, 0350, 0351, 0373, 0453,
0468
Sandra
0277, 0282, 0342
Sansui
0043, 0109, 0320, 0350, 0400
Sanyo
0008, 0019, 0068, 0070, 0071,
0099, 0161, 0168, 0223, 0237,
0277, 0282, 0288, 0295, 0323,
0342, 0344, 0369, 0469
SBR
0320, 0349
Sceptre
0235, 0244
Schaub Lorenz 0347
Schneider
0282, 0316, 0318, 0320, 0333,
0340, 0342, 0349, 0350, 0382
Scotch
0026, 0031
Scott
0008, 0012, 0026, 0031, 0058,
0059, 0149, 0179
Sears
0008, 0010, 0019, 0021, 0026,
0027, 0031, 0049, 0051, 0059,
0111
SEG
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0341, 0342, 0344, 0349, 0382

SEI
SEI-Sinudyne
Seleco
Sencora
Sentra
Serino
Sharp

0320
0339, 0341, 0347
0344, 0346, 0347
0323, 0343
0323
0277
0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0007,
0008, 0012, 0026, 0060, 0088,
0089, 0091, 0138, 0165, 0170,
0178, 0198, 0229, 0262, 0278,
0279, 0291, 0308, 0312, 0336,
0344, 0354, 0370, 0449, 0450,
0451, 0464, 0474, 0476, 0481
Sheng Chia
0178
Shogun
0008
Siarem
0320, 0339, 0341
Sierra
0320, 0350
Siesta
0161
Signature
0054
Silva
0277
Silver
0344
Singer
0321, 0339, 0341
Sinudyne
0320, 0339, 0341, 0349
Skantic
0347
Skyworth
0402, 0492, 0493, 0495
Solavox
0347
Sonitron
0161, 0282
Sonoko
0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0342,
0343, 0349, 0350
Sonolor
0321, 0347
Sontec
0161, 0320, 0349, 0350
Sony
0038, 0044, 0045, 0047, 0055,
0090, 0104, 0105, 0107, 0110,
0123, 0184, 0220, 0248, 0249,
0251, 0252, 0254, 0326, 0343,
0344, 0371, 0374, 0457, 0475,
0486
Sound & Vision 0340, 0341
Soundesign
0008, 0026, 0031, 0058, 0059,
0179
Soundwave
0320, 0349, 0350
Squareview
0051
SSS
0008, 0058, 0179
Standard
0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0350
Starlite
0058, 0179, 0320, 0323, 0349
Stenway
0348
Stern
0346, 0347
Strato
0320, 0323
Stylandia
0282
Sunkai
0343
Sunstar
0320, 0323
Sunwood
0320, 0323, 0343, 0350
Superla
0277, 0282, 0342
Superscan
0013, 0178

SuperTech
Supra
Supre-Macy
Supreme
Susumu
Sutron
SVA
Sydney
Sylvania

0277, 0320, 0323
0323, 0343
0057
0055, 0107
0340
0323, 0343
0151
0277, 0282, 0342
0008, 0009, 0010, 0011, 0013,
0026, 0048, 0050, 0051, 0128,
0227, 0253
Symphonic
0051, 0058, 0062, 0128, 0179,
0215
Syntax
0199
Syntax-Brillian 0199
Sysline
0349
Sytong
0277
Tandy
0178, 0282, 0336, 0340, 0342,
0347
Tashiko
0277, 0282, 0342, 0344, 0346
Tatung
0052, 0177, 0282, 0320, 0342,
0349, 0350
TCM
0337, 0343
TCL
0400, 0401, 0403, 0406, 0494
Teac
0282, 0320, 0400
Tec
0282, 0323, 0342, 0343
Technics
0017, 0023, 0056
TechniSat
0274, 0496, 0497, 0499
Techwood
0008, 0023, 0026, 0056
TEDELEX
0282
Teknika
0007, 0008, 0010, 0012, 0026,
0053, 0054, 0058, 0059, 0179
Teleavia
0345
Telecor
0282, 0320
Telefunken
0320, 0322, 0345, 0350
Telegazi
0320
Telemeister
0320
Telesonic
0320
Telestar
0320
Teletech
0320, 0323, 0343, 0349
Teleton
0282, 0342
Televideon
0277
Televiso
0321
Tensai
0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343,
0350
Tesmet
0350
Tevion
0337, 0343
Texet
0277, 0282, 0323, 0342
Thomson
0162, 0188, 0189, 0285, 0320,
0322, 0342, 0345, 0350
Thorn
0320, 0349
TMK
0008, 0026, 0031
TNCi
0030
Tokai
0282, 0320, 0350
Tokyo
0277, 0342
En

Tomashi
Toshiba

0348
0018, 0019, 0040, 0041, 0046,
0073, 0100, 0103, 0108, 0109,
0111, 0121, 0132, 0166, 0208,
0210, 0214, 0217, 0260, 0268,
0282, 0283, 0293, 0304, 0306,
0307, 0329, 0344, 0355, 0454,
0491
Totevision
0007
Towada
0282, 0347
Trakton
0282
Trans Continens 0282, 0320
Transtec
0277
Trident
0282
Triumph
0320
Uher
0161, 0171, 0320, 0347, 0350
Ultravox
0277, 0320, 0339, 0341, 0342
Unic Line
0320
United
0349
Universum
0161, 0171, 0282, 0320, 0337,
0349, 0350, 0351
Univox
0320
Vector Research 0050
Vestel
0282, 0320, 0346, 0347, 0349,
0350, 0351
Vexa
0320, 0323, 0343, 0349
Victor
0015, 0344, 0350
VIDEOLOGIC 0277
Videologique
0277, 0282, 0340, 0342
0320, 0350
VideoSystem
Videotechnic
0277, 0282
Vidikron
0010
Vidtech
0008, 0026, 0031, 0053
Viewsonic
0176, 0203, 0232, 0364
Viking
0057
Viore
0148
Visiola
0277, 0342
Vision
0282, 0320, 0350
Vizio
0008, 0177, 0218, 0242, 0500,
0501, 0502, 0503, 0506
Vortec
0320, 0349, 0350
Voxson
0171, 0320, 0339, 0346, 0347,
0350
Waltham
0282, 0320, 0342
Wards
0008, 0009, 0010, 0026, 0031,
0048, 0049, 0050, 0053, 0054,
0059
Watson
0320, 0349, 0350
Watt Radio
0277, 0341, 0342
Waycon
0111
Wega
0320, 0339, 0344
Wegavox
0323
Weltblick
0282, 0320, 0349, 0350
Westinghouse 0107, 0216, 0220

201

White Westinghouse
0037, 0090, 0277, 0320, 0341,
0342, 0349
Wincom
0101, 0106
Xrypton
0320
Yamaha
0008, 0026, 0050, 0053, 0080,
0081, 0082, 0083, 0086, 0087
Yamishi
0282, 0320
Yokan
0320
Yoko
0161, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0349,
0350
Yorx
0340
Zanussi
0282, 0346
Zenith
0008, 0028, 0029, 0030, 0031,
0054, 0061, 0062

VCR
ABS
Adventura
Adyson
Aiwa
Akai
Akiba
Akura
Alba

1016
1069
1008
1024, 1026, 1027, 1069
1021, 1027
1008, 1029
1008, 1027, 1029
1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029,
1030
Alienware
1016
Ambassador
1030
American High 1068
Amstrad
1008, 1009, 1026
Anitech
1008, 1029
Apex
1088
ASA
1028, 1031
Asha
1070
Asuka
1008, 1026, 1028, 1029, 1031
Audio Dynamics 1064
Audiosonic
1009
Audiovox
1071
Baird
1009, 1025, 1026, 1027
Bang & Olufsen 1017
Basic Line
1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029,
1030
Baur
1028
Beaumark
1070
Bell & Howell 1065
Bestar
1009, 1025, 1030
Black Panther Line
1009, 1025
Blaupunkt
1028
Bondstec
1008, 1030
Broksonic
1100

Bush

1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029,
1049, 1051, 1063, 1217
Calix
1071
Candle
1070, 1071
Canon
1068
Cathay
1009
Catron
1030
CGE
1026, 1027
Cimline
1008, 1024, 1029
CineVision
1104
Citizen
1070, 1071
Clatronic
1008, 1030
Colortyme
1064
Condor
1009, 1025, 1030
Craig
1070, 1071
Crown
1008, 1009, 1025, 1029, 1030
Curtis Mathes 1064, 1068, 1070
Cybernex
1070
CyberPower
1016
Daewoo
1009, 1025, 1030, 1038, 1069,
1223
Dansai
1008, 1009, 1029
Dantax
1024
Daytron
1009, 1025
DBX
1064
De Graaf
1028
Decca
1026, 1027, 1028
Dell
1016
Denko
1008
DiamondVision 1096
DigiFusion
1014
DIRECTV
1019, 1105, 1110, 1111, 1113,
1116, 1122
Dish Network 1018
Dishpro
1018
Dual
1009, 1027, 1028
Dumont
1026, 1028
Durabrand
1114
Dynatech
1069
Echostar
1018
Elbe
1009
Elcatech
1008
Electrohome
1071
Electrophonic 1071
Elsay
1008
Elta
1008, 1009, 1029
Emerson
1008, 1020, 1068, 1069, 1071
ESC
1009, 1025
Etzuko
1008, 1029
Expressvu
1018
Ferguson
1027
Fidelity
1008, 1026
Finlandia
1028
Finlux
1026, 1027, 1028
Firstline
1008, 1024, 1029, 1031

Instant Replay
Interbuy
Interfunk
Intervision
Irradio
ITT
ITV
JC Penney
JCL
JVC

1068
1008, 1031
1028
1009, 1026
1008, 1029, 1031
1027
1009, 1025, 1031
1064, 1065, 1068, 1070, 1071
1068
1007, 1018, 1027, 1039, 1064,
1065, 1066, 1067, 1078, 1089,
1092, 1093, 1094, 1095, 1113,
1208, 1209, 1212, 1213, 1215,
1218
Kaisui
1008, 1029
Karcher
1028
Kendo
1008, 1024, 1025, 1030
Kenwood
1027, 1064, 1065
Kodak
1068, 1071
Korpel
1008, 1029
Kyoto
1008
Lenco
1025
Leyco
1008, 1029
LG
1010, 1026, 1031, 1047, 1054,
1056, 1071, 1103, 1221
Lifetec
1024
Linksys
1016
Lloyd's
1069
Loewe Opta
1028, 1031
Logik
1008, 1029
Lumatron
1009, 1025
Luxor
1008
LXI
1071
M Electronic
1026
Magnavox
1020, 1068, 1114, 1126
Magnin
1071
Manesth
1008, 1029
Marantz
1028, 1064, 1065, 1068
Mark
1009
Marta
1071
Matsui
1024, 1031
Matsushita
1068
Media Center PC 1016
Mediator
1028
Medion
1024
MEI
1068
Memorex
1023, 1026, 1031, 1065, 1068,
1069, 1070, 1071, 1098, 1114
Memphis
1008, 1029
MGN Technology 1070
Micromaxx
1024
Microsoft
1016
Microstar
1024
Migros
1026
Mind
1016

Fisher
Flint
Formenti/Phoenix
Frontech
Fuji
Fujitsu
Funai
Galaxy
Garrard
Gateway
GBC
GE
GEC
Geloso
General
General Technic
GOI
GoldHand
Goldstar
Goodmans

1065
1024
1028
1030
1068
1026
1026, 1069
1026
1069
1016
1029, 1030
1068, 1070
1028
1029
1030
1024
1018
1008, 1029
1026, 1031, 1064, 1071
1008, 1009, 1025, 1026, 1029,
1030, 1031
Gradiente
1069
Graetz
1027
Granada
1028
Grandin
1008, 1009, 1025, 1026, 1029,
1030, 1031
Grundig
1028, 1029
Hanseatic
1009, 1028, 1031
Harley Davidson 1069
Harman/Kardon 1064
Harwood
1008
HCM
1008, 1029
Headquarter
1065
Hewlett Packard 1016
Hinari
1008, 1009, 1024, 1029
Hisawa
1024
Hitachi
1011, 1026, 1027, 1028, 1046,
1062
HNS
1110
Howard Computers
1016
HP
1016
HTS
1018
Hughes
1111, 1113, 1122
Hughes Network Systems
1110, 1116
Humax
1012, 1110, 1113
Hush
1016
Hypson
1008, 1009, 1024, 1029
iBUYPOWER 1016
Impego
1030
Imperial
1026
Inno Hit
1008, 1009, 1025, 1028, 1029,
1030
Innovation
1024
En

202

Mitsubishi
Motorola
MTC
Multitech

1026, 1028, 1079
1068
1070
1008, 1026, 1028, 1029, 1030,
1069, 1070
Murphy
1026
NEC
1027, 1064, 1065
Neckermann
1027, 1028
NEI
1028
Nesco
1008, 1029
Nikkai
1008, 1009, 1030
Nikko
1071
Niveus Media 1016
Noblex
1070
Nokia
1009, 1027
Nordmende
1027
Northgate
1016
Oceanic
1026, 1027
Okano
1008, 1009, 1024
Olympus
1068
Optimus
1071
Orion
1023, 1024, 1051, 1115, 1217
Orson
1026
Osaki
1008, 1026, 1029, 1031
Otto Versand
1028
Palladium
1008, 1027, 1029, 1031
Panasonic
1000, 1022, 1044, 1055, 1068,
1072, 1085, 1090, 1091, 1120,
1121, 1214
Pathe Marconi 1027
Perdio
1026
Philco
1008, 1068
Philips
1006, 1013, 1028, 1035, 1040,
1045, 1046, 1050, 1058, 1059,
1061, 1068, 1076, 1101, 1110,
1113, 1116, 1117, 1122, 1126,
1210, 1211
Philips Magnavox 1076
Phonola
1028
Pilot
1071
Pioneer
1028, 1036
Polaroid
1088, 1099
Portland
1009, 1025, 1030
Prinz
1026
Profex
1029
Proline
1026
Proscan
1019
Prosonic
1009, 1024
Pulsar
1114
Pye
1028, 1102
Quarter
1065
Quartz
1065
Quasar
1068
Quelle
1026, 1028
Radialva
1008

RadioShack
1071
RadioShack/Realistic
1065, 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071
Radiola
1028
Radix
1071
Randex
1071
RCA
1019, 1068, 1070, 1075, 1110,
1113, 1122, 1125
Realistic
1065, 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071
ReplayTV
1022, 1123
Rex
1027
RFT
1008, 1028, 1030
Ricavision
1016
Roadstar
1008, 1009, 1025, 1029, 1031
Royal
1008
Runco
1114
Saba
1027
Saisho
1024, 1029
Samsung
1002, 1034, 1041, 1043, 1057,
1060, 1070, 1084, 1110, 1116,
1122, 1124, 1220, 1222
Samurai
1008, 1030
Sanky
1114
Sansui
1023, 1027, 1106, 1115
Sanyo
1032, 1065, 1070
Saville
1009
SBR
1028
Schaub Lorenz 1026, 1027
Schneider
1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1026,
1028, 1029, 1030, 1031
Sears
1065, 1068, 1071
SEG
1008, 1009, 1029
SEI-Sinudyne 1028
Seleco
1027
Sentra
1008, 1030
Sentron
1008, 1029
Sharp
1003, 1033, 1077, 1107, 1127,
1219
Shintom
1008, 1029
Shivaki
1031
Shogun
1070
Siemens
1031
Silva
1031
Silver
1009
Singer
1068
Sinudyne
1028
Solavox
1030
Sonic Blue
1022, 1123
Sonneclair
1008
Sonoko
1009, 1025
Sontec
1031
Sony
1001, 1016, 1048, 1053, 1073,
1074, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083,
1108, 1118, 1216
Stack
1016

Voodoo
Wards
Weltblick
XR-1000
Yamaha
Yamishi
Yokan
Yoko
Zenith
ZT Group

Stack 9
Standard
Stern
STS
Sunkai
Sunstar
Suntronic
Sunwood
Superscan
Sylvania
Symphonic
Systemax
Tagar Systems
Taisho
Tandberg
Tandy
Tashiko
Tatung
TCM
Teac
Tec
Technics
Teknika
Teleavia
Telefunken
Teletech
Tenosal
Tensai
Tevion
Thomson
Thorn
Tivo

1016
1009, 1025
1009
1068
1024
1026
1026
1008, 1029
1020
1020, 1068, 1069, 1102, 1126
1008, 1069, 1126
1016
1016
1024
1009
1065
1026, 1071
1026, 1027, 1028
1015, 1024, 1042
1009, 1069
1008, 1009, 1030
1068
1068, 1069, 1071
1027
1027
1008, 1009
1008, 1029
1008, 1026, 1029, 1031
1024
1005, 1027
1027
1108, 1110, 1111, 1113, 1117,
1118, 1119, 1122
TMK
1070
Tokai
1008, 1029, 1031
Tonsai
1029
Toshiba
1004, 1016, 1027, 1028, 1037,
1049, 1052, 1086, 1087, 1097,
1109, 1112, 1194
Totevision
1070, 1071
Touch
1016
Towada
1008, 1029
Towika
1008, 1029
TVA
1030
Uher
1031
UltimateTV
1019
Ultravox
1009
Unitech
1070
United Quick Star 1009, 1025
Universum
1026, 1028, 1031
Vector Research 1064
Video Concepts 1064
Videon
1024
Videosonic
1070
Viewsonic
1016
En

1016
1068, 1069, 1070, 1071
1031
1068, 1069
1064, 1065
1008, 1029
1008, 1029
1008, 1029, 1030, 1031
1114
1016

DVD
4Kus
2051
Accurian
2142
Advent
2155, 2251
AEG
2362
Airis
2364
Aiwa
2322
Akai
2145, 2177, 2179, 2248
Akura
2356
Alba
2064, 2165, 2186, 2337, 2346
Alco
2149
Alize
2361
Allegro
2133
Amitech
2362
Amphion MediaWorks
2195
AMW
2195, 2363
Apex
2030, 2124, 2125, 2126, 2127,
2130, 2131
Apple
2241
Arrgo
2138
Asono
2364
Aspire
2152, 2222
Astar
2240
ATACOM
2364
Audiovox
2061, 2149
Avious
2367
Awa
2363
Axion
2249
Bang & Olufsen 2128
Baze
2367
BBK
2364
Bellagio
2363
Best Buy
2359
Blaupunkt
2131
Blue Parade
2157
Boghe
2382
Brainwave
2362
Brandt
2148, 2188
Broksonic
2145, 2146
Bush
2064, 2110, 2170, 2268, 2290,
2346, 2358, 2367, 2383

203

California Audio Labs
2151
Cambridge Audio 2354
CAT
2352, 2353
CAVS
2192
Centrum
2353
CGV
2354, 2362
Changhong
2140
Cinetec
2363
CineVision
2133, 2237
Clatronic
2358, 2367
Coby
2031, 2046, 2360
Conia
2383
Continental Edison
2363
Crown
2362
C-Tech
2355
Curtis Mathes 2139
CVG
2377
CyberHome
2022, 2098, 2138, 2187, 2336
Cytron
2244
Daenyx
2363
Daewoo
2001, 2133, 2276, 2298, 2330,
2362, 2363, 2377
Daewoo International
2363
Dalton
2357
Dansai
2362, 2381
Daytek
2184, 2195, 2363
Dayton
2363
DEC
2358
Decca
2362
Denon
2059, 2151, 2193, 2332
Denver
2356, 2358, 2360, 2370
Denzel
2380
Desay
2205
Diamond
2354, 2355
DiamondVision 2225, 2232
Disney
2010, 2028
DK Digital
2339
Dmtech
2176
Dual
2380
DUNE
2509
Durabrand
2136
DVX
2355
Easy Home
2359
Eclipse
2354
E-Dem
2364
Electrohome
2362
Elin
2362
Elta
2341, 2361, 2362
Emerson
2129, 2137, 2150
Enterprise
2129
Enzer
2380
Epson
2247

ESA
2137
Finlux
2354, 2362, 2367
Fintec
2377
Fisher
2134
Funai
2137
Gateway
2051
GE
2029, 2131, 2156
Gericom
2351
GFM
2226
Giec
2382
Global Solutions 2355
Global Sphere 2355
Go Video
2133, 2213
Goodmans
2165, 2280, 2291, 2358, 2371,
2376, 2382
GPX
2227
Gradiente
2151
Graetz
2380
Greenhill
2131
Grundig
2349
Grunkel
2362, 2366
GVG
2377
H&B
2358
H_her
2364
Haaz
2354, 2355
Haier
2254
Harman/Kardon 2047, 2135
HiMAX
2359
Hitachi
2062, 2090, 2115, 2274, 2316,
2359, 2380
Hiteker
2130
Home Tech Industries
2364
Hyundai
2366
Ilo
2245
Initial
2131, 2245
Innovation
2182
Insignia
2002, 2137, 2253
Integra
2157
Irradio
2053
iSymphony
2246
JBL
2135
JVC
2020, 2096, 2097, 2099, 2100,
2101, 2102, 2103, 2106, 2107,
2160, 2257, 2260, 2262, 2263,
2321, 2324, 2326, 2327, 2343,
2464, 2465, 2468, 2469, 2471
Jwin
2198
Kansai
2360
Kawasaki
2149
Kennex
2362
Kenwood
2041, 2151, 2348
KeyPlug
2362
Kiiro
2362
Kingavon
2358

Kiss
KLH
Koda
Koss
KXD
Landel
Lasonic
Lawson
Lecson
Lenco
Lenoxx
LG
Life
Lifetec
Limit
Liquid Video
Liteon
Loewe
LogicLab
Magnavox
Magnex
Majestic
Marantz
Marquant
Matsui
McIntosh
Mecotek
Medion
Memorex
MiCO
Micromaxx
Microsoft
Microstar
Minoka
Minowa
Mintek
Mitsubishi
Mizuda
Monyka
Mustek
Mx Onda
Mystral
Naiko
Nesa
Neufunk
Nevir
Next Base
Nexxtech
NU-TEC
Onkyo
Oopla
Oppo

2380
2131, 2149
2358
2013, 2148, 2158
2359
2143
2132
2355
2381
2358, 2362, 2367
2136, 2153
2002, 2033, 2038, 2057, 2129,
2133, 2189, 2191, 2223, 2238,
2270, 2288, 2335, 2373, 2375
2182
2182
2355
2158
2043, 2051, 2142
2320
2355
2025, 2050, 2137, 2150, 2159,
2224, 2230, 2358
2367
2360
2328
2362
2148, 2378
2199
2362
2182
2028, 2145, 2234
2354, 2382
2182
2156
2182
2362
2367
2131, 2245
2003
2358, 2359
2380
2186
2354
2366
2362
2131
2380
2362
2143
2243
2383
2159, 2368
2051
2196, 2255
En

Optim
Optimus
Orava
Orbit
Orion
Oritron
P&B
Pacific
Panasonic

Parasound
peeKTON
Philips

Phonotrend
Pioneer

Pointer
Polaroid
Portland
Powerpoint
Prima
Proceed
Proscan
Prosonic
Protron
Provision
Pye
Qwestar
Raite
RCA
RedStar
Regent
Reoc
Rimax
Rio
Roadstar
Ronin
Rotel

204

2381
2180
2358
2363
2073, 2110
2148, 2158
2358
2355
2011, 2024, 2034, 2042, 2058,
2062, 2066, 2067, 2093, 2116,
2117, 2118, 2119, 2120, 2121,
2122, 2123, 2151, 2159, 2164,
2166, 2167, 2172, 2173, 2175,
2209, 2214, 2275, 2277, 2278,
2281, 2282, 2283, 2301, 2374,
2470
2197
2364
2008, 2012, 2025, 2044, 2050,
2051, 2053, 2060, 2072, 2108,
2111, 2147, 2159, 2163, 2169,
2174, 2181, 2185, 2230, 2261,
2266, 2267, 2286, 2287, 2289,
2295, 2300, 2302, 2317, 2328,
2338, 2342, 2350, 2467
2367
2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2035,
2092, 2094, 2095, 2109, 2157,
2180, 2190, 2212, 2269, 2272,
2299, 2304, 2305, 2306, 2307,
2308, 2309, 2310, 2311, 2344,
2345, 2347, 2379
2362
2125, 2215, 2235
2362
2363
2252
2130
2156
2360, 2377
2202
2358
2144
2148
2380
2021, 2029, 2104, 2105, 2131,
2149, 2156, 2157, 2229
2356, 2360, 2362
2153
2355
2361
2133
2331, 2358
2363
2203

Rowa
Rownsonic
Saba
Sabaki
Saivod
Sampo
Samsung

2154, 2383
2353
2148, 2188
2355
2362
2141
2000, 2045, 2077, 2112, 2113,
2114, 2115, 2151, 2200, 2216,
2219, 2228, 2264, 2265, 2271,
2279, 2294, 2303, 2329, 2365
Sansui
2073, 2145, 2354, 2355, 2362
Sanyo
2134, 2145, 2217, 2292
ScanMagic
2186
Schaub Lorenz 2362
Schneider
2176
Scientific Labs 2355
Scott
2161, 2357
Seeltech
2364
SEG
2161, 2355, 2363, 2380
Sharp
2006, 2040, 2088, 2091, 2182,
2194, 2220, 2221, 2231, 2236,
2293, 2340
Shinsonic
2245
Sigmatek
2359, 2364
Silva
2356
Singer
2354, 2355
Skymaster
2325, 2355
Skyworth
2356
Slim Art
2362
SM Electronic 2355
Sonic Blue
2133
Sontech
2366
Sony
2004, 2005, 2007, 2009, 2014,
2015, 2023, 2026, 2027, 2052,
2068, 2069, 2070, 2071, 2074,
2075, 2084, 2085, 2087, 2168,
2171, 2208, 2210, 2211, 2258,
2273, 2284, 2285, 2312, 2313,
2314, 2315, 2318, 2319, 2466
Soundmaster
2355
Soundmax
2355
Spectra
2363
Spectroniq
2201
Standard
2355
Star Cluster
2355
Starmedia
2358, 2364
Sungale
2204
Sunkai
2362
Superscan
2150
Supervision
2355
Sylvania
2012, 2137, 2150, 2178, 2230,
2239
Symphonic
2108, 2230
Synn
2355
T.D.E. Systems 2366

Tatung
TCM
Teac
Tec
Technics
Technika
Telefunken
Tensai
Tevion
Theta Digital
Thomson
Tokai
Top Suxess
Toshiba

2001, 2362
2182, 2297
2149, 2333, 2355, 2383
2356
2151
2362, 2367
2353
2362
2182, 2355, 2357
2157
2183, 2188, 2334, 2372
2356, 2380
2364
2032, 2036, 2037, 2039, 2048,
2049, 2054, 2055, 2072, 2073,
2076, 2078, 2079, 2086, 2145,
2159, 2218, 2233, 2256, 2259,
2296, 2369, 2508
TRANScontinents 2363, 2367
Transonic
2367
Trio
2362
Trutech
2242
TruVision
2359
TSM
2364
Umax
2361
United
2367
Urban Concepts 2159
US Logic
2245
Venturer
2149
Viewmaster
2364
Vocopro
2206
VocoStar
2207
Waitec
2364
Welltech
2382
Westinghouse 2063, 2250
Wharfedale
2354, 2355
Woxter
2361, 2364
Xbox
2156, 2183
Xlogic
2355, 2362
XMS
2362
Xoro
2382
Yamada
2051, 2361, 2363
Yamaha
2056, 2064, 2065, 2080, 2081,
2082, 2083, 2089, 2118, 2151,
2323
Yamakawa
2363, 2380
Yukai
2186
Zenith
2002, 2129, 2133, 2159, 2223

Blu-ray Disc
Denon
Hitachi

2452, 2500, 2501
2460, 2461, 2463

JVC
LG
Marantz (US)
Mitsubishi
Onkyo
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Samsung
Sharp
Sony
Toshiba
Yamaha

Sanyo
Sony

2472, 2473, 2475, 2478, 2496,
2499, 2511
2033, 2456, 2457
2454, 2455
2450, 2451
2504
2011, 2209, 2214, 2476, 2477,
2479
2510
2212, 2506
2045, 2113, 2498
2194, 2220, 2221, 2497, 2502,
2503
2075, 2453, 2458, 2459, 2507
2462
2064, 2448, 2449, 2474, 2505

Sylvania
Toshiba
Yamaha

Cable
ABC

3002, 3003, 3017, 3066, 3067,
3086, 3093, 3119, 3122
ADB
3020
Adelphia
3081
Alcatel
3016
Americast
3124
Amstrad
3022, 3098
Antronix
3065, 3070
Archer
3070
Arcon
3098
AT&T
3095
Axis
3098
Bell South
3124
Cable Vision
3092
Cabletenna
3065
Cabletime
3104
Cableview
3087
Clearmaster
3127
ClearMax
3127
Clyde Cablevision 3105
Colour Voice
3068
Comcast
3084, 3088, 3117
Comcrypt
3107
Comtronics
3069
Contec
3074
Coolmax
3127
COX
3084
Cryptovision
3110
Director
3084
Eastern
3075
Everquest
3123
Fidelity
3098
Filmnet
3107
Filmnet Cablecrypt
3111
Filmnet Comcrypt
3111
Finlux
3097
FIOS
3005
Focus
3126
Foxtel
3022
France Telecom 3100, 3101
Freebox
3023
GC Electronics 3070

DVR
Bush
Hitachi
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
RCA
Samsung
Sharp
Sony
Toshiba
Victor
Yamaha

2110
2090
2066, 2067, 2093, 2116, 2117,
2119, 2120, 2122, 2123
2108, 2111
2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2092,
2094, 2095, 2109
2105
2113, 2219
2088, 2091
2084, 2085, 2087
2086
2475
2089, 2118

DVD Recorder
Aspire
Astar
Broksonic
Go Video
Hitachi
Insignia
Irradio
JVC
LG
Liteon
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Pye
Samsung
Sansui

2222
2240
2146
2213
2062
2002
2053
2100, 2101, 2106, 2107
2033, 2057, 2223, 2238
2043
2011, 2034, 2058, 2062, 2116,
2117, 2119, 2120, 2121, 2123
2008, 2044, 2050, 2051, 2147
2017, 2035
2144
2000, 2112, 2216
2073
En

2217
2004, 2005, 2007, 2052, 2068,
2069, 2074, 2208, 2210, 2211
2239
2032, 2036, 2037, 2039, 2049,
2054, 2055, 2076
2056

205

GE
3066, 3093
GEC
3105
Gemini
3072, 3123
General Instrument
3017, 3025, 3066, 3084, 3090,
3096, 3117
Goldstar
3120
Gooding
3099
Grundig
3098, 3099
Hamlin
3073, 3078
Hirschmann
3097
Hitachi
3066
HomeChoice
3106
Humax
3021, 3080, 3083
ITT Nokia
3097
Jasco
3123
Jerrold
3017, 3018, 3025, 3066, 3072,
3084, 3090, 3096, 3119, 3123
JVC
3099
Kabel Deutschland
3024, 3027, 3121
Macab
3101
Magnavox
3079
Maspro
3099
Matsui
3099
MegaCable
3117
Memorex
3076, 3122
Minerva
3099
Mnet
3107
Motorola
3025, 3026, 3084, 3088, 3090,
3095, 3117
Movie Time
3077, 3109
Mr Zapp
3101
Multichoice
3107
Multitech
3127
NEC
3064
NET Brazil
3085
Nokia
3097
Noos
3101
NSC
3077
Oak
3074
Pace
3006, 3089, 3121
Palladium
3099
Panasonic
3112, 3118, 3122
Paragon
3122
Philips
3068, 3071, 3079, 3099, 3100,
3101, 3103
Pioneer
3001, 3006, 3094, 3098, 3114,
3116, 3120
Popular Mechanics
3126
Proscan
3066, 3093
Pulsar
3122
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
3018

Quasar
RadioShack
RCA
Realistic
Recoton
Regal
Regency
Rembrandt
Runco
Sagem
Samsung
SAT
Scientific Atlanta

3122
3123, 3127
3030, 3031, 3087, 3118
3070
3126
3078
3075
3066
3122
3101
3069, 3089, 3114, 3120
3098
3000, 3001, 3002, 3003, 3006,
3028, 3029, 3081, 3086, 3089,
3094, 3095, 3108
Signal
3072, 3123
Signature
3066
Sony
3092, 3125
Sprucer
3118
Standard Component
3115
Starcom
3017, 3072, 3119, 3123
Stargate
3072, 3123
Starquest
3072, 3123
Supercable
3090
Supermax
3127
Tele+1
3107, 3111
TELENET
3004
Telepiu
3107
Thomson
3082, 3091
TIME WARNER 3084
Tocom
3067
Torx
3017
Toshiba
3122
Tristar
3127
Tudi
3102
Tusa
3072, 3123
TV86
3077
Unika
3065, 3070
United Cable
3018, 3119
Universal
3065, 3070
Universum
3097, 3099
V2
3127
Verizon Fios
3007
Videoway
3019
View Star
3074, 3077, 3079
Viewmaster
3127
Vision
3127
Visiopass
3097, 3100, 3101
Vortex View
3127
Wittenberg
3098
Zenith
3113, 3122, 3124
Zentek
3126

CHEROKEE
Chess
CityCom
Clatronic
CNT
Comag
Commlink
Comtech
Condor
Connexions
Conrad
Conrad Electronic
Contec
Coolsat
Cosat
Coship
Crown
Daeryung
Daewoo
DDC
Delega
Dew
Diamond
Digiality
Digital Stream
DIRECTV

Satellite
AB Sat
AccessHD
ADB
AGS
Akai
Alba

4216, 4217
4104
4220
4216
4053, 4055
4001, 4004, 4006, 4007, 4062,
4217
Aldes
4005, 4007, 4010
Allsat
4048, 4053, 4055
Allsonic
4005, 4008, 4024
Alltech
4217
Alpha
4053
Alpha Digital
4104
Alphastar
4077
Amitronica
4217
Amstrad
4011, 4035, 4217, 4218
Anglo
4217
Ankaro
4005, 4008, 4024, 4217
Anttron
4001, 4004
Apollo
4001
Armstrong
4011, 4053
Artec
4100
Asat
4053, 4055
ASLF
4217
Astacom
4216
Astra
4009, 4011, 4054, 4217, 4219
Astro
4004, 4008, 4010, 4015, 4024,
4213, 4218, 4219
AudioTon
4004, 4048
Aurora
4222, 4246
Austar
4222, 4246
Axiel
4216
Axis
4008, 4009, 4024, 4050
BBK
4205
Best
4008, 4024
Blaupunkt
4015
Blue Sky
4217
Boca
4011, 4054, 4059, 4217
Boston
4216
Brain Wave
4013
Broadcast
4012
Broco
4217
BSkyB
4035, 4041
BT
4216
Bubu Sat
4217
Bush
4006, 4045
Cambridge
4218
Canal Satellite 4213
Canal+
4213
CaptiveWorks 4099
Channel Master 4007, 4110
Chaparral
4075
En

Discoverer
Discovery
Diseqc
Dish Network
Dishpro
Distrisat
Ditristrad
DNT
Drake
DStv
Dune
Echostar
Einhell
Elap
Elekta
Elsat
Elta
Emanon
Emme Esse
Engel
Ep Sat

206

4216
4212, 4217
4006, 4215, 4219
4013
4010
4080, 4081, 4082, 4083, 4086
4005
4050
4008, 4024, 4219
4014, 4024
4024, 4215, 4218, 4219
4217, 4219
4050
4096
4048
4109
4011
4014
4057, 4217
4007
4007
4050
4051
4219
4105
4056, 4064, 4067, 4068, 4070,
4071, 4074, 4107, 4116, 4119,
4121, 4122, 4123, 4127, 4192,
4193, 4194, 4195, 4196, 4197,
4198, 4199, 4200, 4201, 4202,
4203, 4206, 4207, 4221
4212
4216
4216
4018, 4065, 4089, 4092, 4094,
4095, 4117
4018, 4117
4053
4048
4014, 4053, 4055
4072
4222, 4246
4024, 4240, 4242
4014, 4018, 4065, 4089, 4117,
4217
4001, 4005, 4011, 4217, 4218
4216, 4217
4010
4217
4001, 4008, 4024, 4048, 4053,
4055
4001
4008, 4024
4217
4006

EURIEULT
Eurodec
Europa
Europhon
Eurosat
Eurosky

4031
4052
4053, 4218, 4219
4219
4011
4008, 4011, 4215, 4218, 4219,
4024
Eurostar
4011, 4215, 4219
Eutelsat
4217
Exator
4001, 4004
Expressvu
4117
Fenner
4024, 4212, 4217
Ferguson
4006, 4052, 4214
Fidelity
4218
Finlandia
4006
Finlux
4006
FinnSat
4050, 4052
Flair Mate
4217
Foxtel
4204, 4222, 4244, 4245, 4246,
4247
Freecom
4001, 4049, 4218
FTEmaximal
4024, 4217
Fuba
4001, 4008, 4014, 4015, 4024,
4055, 4215
Galaxis
4005, 4008, 4009, 4024, 4048,
4050, 4215, 4222, 4246
GE
4066, 4093, 4111, 4197
General Instrument
4019, 4073
GMI
4011
GOI
4117
Goldbox
4213
GoldStar
4049
Goodmans
4002, 4006, 4029
Goodmind
4111
Grandin
4031
Grothusen
4001, 4049
Grundig
4004, 4006, 4015, 4035, 4211,
4218, 4222, 4246
Hänsel & Gretel 4219
Hantor
4001, 4013
Hanuri
4010
Hauppauge
4044
Heliocom
4219
Helium
4219
Hinari
4007
Hirschmann
4015, 4024, 4210, 4216, 4218,
4219
Hisawa
4013
Hisense
4016
Hitachi
4006, 4114, 4199, 4203
Homecast
4084, 4085, 4087
Houston
4048
HTS
4117

Hughes

4064, 4068, 4192, 4194, 4196,
4202
Hughes Network Systems
4071
Humax
4025, 4030, 4060, 4097
Huth
4005, 4011, 4012, 4013, 4048,
4050, 4219, 4223
Hypson
4031
Ilo
4016
Imex
4031
Innovation
4008
Insignia
4107
Intertronic
4011
Intervision
4048, 4219
ITT Nokia
4006
Jerrold
4019
Johansson
4013
JOK
4216
JSR
4048
JVC
4029, 4065, 4089, 4117
Kamm
4217
Kathrein
4015, 4034, 4042, 4053, 4055,
4063, 4215, 4216, 4217
Kathrein Eurostar 4215
Klap
4216
Konig
4219
Kosmos
4049
KR
4004
Kreiselmeyer
4015
K-SAT
4217
Kyostar
4001
L&S Electronic 4024
Lasat
4008, 4010, 4024, 4054, 4212,
4215, 4219
Lasonic
4108
Lenco
4001, 4024, 4049, 4215, 4217,
4219
Leng
4013
Lennox
4048
Lenson
4218
Lexus
4053
LG
4049, 4103, 4107
Lifesat
4008, 4024, 4212, 4217
Lifetec
4008
Lorenzen
4219
Lorraine
4049
Lupus
4008, 4024
Luxor
4218
Lyonnaise
4052
Macab
4052
Magnavox
4127, 4101
Manata
4031, 4216, 4217
Manhattan
4006, 4010, 4048, 4216
Marantz
4055
Mascom
4010

Maspro
Matsui
Max
Mediabox
Mediamarkt
Mediasat
Medion
Medison
Mega
Memorex
Metronic

4006, 4217
4216
4219
4213
4011
4009, 4213, 4218
4008, 4024, 4217
4217
4053, 4055
4127
4001, 4004, 4005, 4010, 4028,
4031, 4217
Metz
4015
Micro electronic 4217, 4218, 4219
Micro Technology 4217
MicroGem
4106
Micromaxx
4008, 4024
Microstar
4008
Microtec
4217
Minerva
4015
Mitsubishi
4006, 4015, 4202
Mitsumi
4054
Morgan's
4011, 4053, 4054, 4055, 4217
Motorola
4019, 4088, 4090, 4091
Multichoice
4222, 4246
Multitec
4212
Muratto
4049
Mysat
4217
Navex
4013
Neuhaus
4009, 4048, 4217, 4218, 4219
Neusat
4217
Next Level
4019
NextWave
4223
Nikko
4011, 4217
Nokia
4006, 4040
Nordmende
4001, 4006, 4007, 4010, 4052
Nova
4222
Novis
4013
Oceanic
4051
Octagon
4001, 4004, 4050
Okano
4011
Optex
4048
Optus
4204, 4213, 4222, 4223, 4246
Orbitech
4001, 4212, 4213, 4218
OSat
4004
Otto Versand
4015
Pace
4006, 4015, 4035, 4043, 4047,
4204, 4216, 4243
Pacific
4051
Packsat
4216
Palcom
4007
Palladium
4011, 4218
Palsat
4212, 4218
Panasat
4222, 4246
En

Panasonic
Panda
Pansat
Patriot
Paysat
PCT
Philco
Philips
Phoenix
Phonotrend
Pioneer
Polsat
Predki
Premiere
Priesner
Primestar
Profile
Promax
Prosat
Proscan
Protek
Proton
Provision
Quadral
Quelle
Quiero
RadioShack
Radiola
Radix
Rainbow
RCA
Realistic
Redpoint
Redstar
RFT
Roadstar
Roch
Rover
Saba
Sabre
Sagem
Sakura
Samsung
SAT
Sat Cruiser
Sat Partner
Sat Team
Satcom

207

4006, 4035, 4036, 4121, 4124,
4126, 4198, 4221
4006, 4219
4125
4216
4127
4110
4101
4006, 4033, 4053, 4055, 4061,
4068, 4071, 4127, 4196, 4201,
4202, 4203, 4206, 4213, 4216
4050
4006, 4005, 4048
4046, 4213
4052
4013
4048, 4213
4011
4076
4216
4006
4005, 4007
4066, 4093, 4122, 4197
4051
4016
4010
4005, 4007, 4008, 4216, 4024
4015, 4215, 4219
4052
4019
4053, 4055
4014, 4037
4004
4066, 4093, 4112, 4113, 4116,
4118, 4119, 4197, 4122, 4207
4078
4009
4008, 4024
4005, 4053, 4055
4217
4031
4024, 4217
4010, 4215, 4216, 4219
4006
4023, 4052
4050
4000, 4001, 4003, 4032, 4064,
4069, 4071, 4120, 4123, 4196,
4200
4007, 4218
4223
4001, 4004, 4010, 4013, 4049,
4218
4217
4012, 4219

Satec
Satelco
Satford
Satmaster
Satplus
Schneider
Schwaiger
SCS
Seemann
SEG
Seleco
Servi Sat
Siemens
Silva
Skantin
Skardin
Skinsat
SKR
Sky Italia
Skymaster
Skymax
SkySat
Skyvision
SM Electronic
Smart
Sony
SR
Star Choice
Starland
Starring
Start Trak
Strong
STS
STVI
Sumida
Sunny Sound
Sunsat
Sunstar
Supermax
Tandberg
Tandy
Tantec
TCM
Techniland
TechniSat
Technology
Technosat
Technowelt
Teco
Telanor
Telasat
Telecom
Telefunken

4217
4024
4012
4012
4212
4008, 4212, 4216
4051, 4212, 4219
4215
4009, 4011, 4014
4001, 4008, 4013, 4024
4048
4031, 4217
4015
4049
4217
4009
4218
4217
4204
4005, 4017, 4022, 4212, 4217
4053, 4055
4212, 4217, 4218, 4219
4048
4212, 4217
4215, 4217
4067, 4070, 4213
4011, 4054
4019
4217
4013
4001
4001, 4004, 4008, 4024, 4049,
4222, 4246
4115
4031
4011
4024
4217
4011, 4024, 4054
4223
4052
4004
4006
4008
4012
4014, 4021, 4026, 4027, 4038,
4039, 4053, 4212, 4213, 4218
4222
4223
4219
4011, 4054
4007
4215, 4219
4217
4001, 4017, 4216

Teleka
Telemaster
TELENET
Telesat
Telestar
Televes
Telewire
Tempo
Tevion
Thomson
Thorens
Thorn
Tivax
Tivo
Tokai
Tonna
Toshiba
Triad
Triasat
Triax
Turnsat
Tvonics
Twinner
UEC
Uher
UltimateTV
Uniden
Unisat
Unitor
Universum
US Digital
Variosat
Vega
Ventana
Viewsat
Visiosat
Voom
Vortec
Welltech
WeTeKom
Wevasat
Wewa
Winersat
Wisi
Woorisat
Worldsat
Xrypton
XSat
Zehnder
Zenith
Zodiac

4004, 4011, 4014, 4218, 4219
4010
4241
4219
4212, 4213, 4218
4006, 4218
4048
4223
4008, 4217
4006, 4020, 4052, 4058, 4208,
4213, 4215, 4216, 4217, 4219
4051
4006
4104
4196
4053
4006, 4012, 4048, 4217, 4218
4194, 4202, 4203
4049
4218
4015, 4215, 4217, 4218
4217
4214
4031, 4217
4204, 4222, 4246
4212
4070
4079, 4127
4011, 4050, 4053
4013
4015, 4215, 4219
4016
4015
4024
4053, 4055
4098
4013, 4048, 4216, 4217
4019
4001
4212
4212, 4218
4006
4006
4013
4006, 4014, 4015, 4218, 4219
4010
4216
4024
4217
4008, 4209, 4010, 4215, 4024
4102, 4107, 4195
4004

CD
Yamaha

5082, 5095, 5114

CD Recorder
Yamaha

5083

MD
Yamaha

5080, 5081, 5086

Tape
Yamaha

5084, 5087

Tuner
Yamaha

5066, 5085, 5088, 5090, 5092

LD
Yamaha

2080

Amplifier
Yamaha

5098

Apple TV
Apple

2241

208

Yamaha Global Site
https://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/

YJ291A0/EN1

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Create Date                     : 2017:04:03 15:09:05+09:00
Modify Date                     : 2017:04:27 16:16:30+09:00
Language                        : en
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Metadata Date                   : 2017:04:27 16:16:30+09:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:2c4efcdd-7373-4240-9878-b492dbaf0407
Instance ID                     : uuid:758150a7-570a-436d-aeb1-2e1bbd63a1ef
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 209

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Yamaha RX A3070/RX A2070 Owner's Manual Web YJ291A0 EN1 A3070 2070 Om UCRABGLF En A0

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation